Home

GA10 Data Logging Software User`s Manual

1. 1 2 Area for setting data 3 Area for setting the Monitor acquisition conditions Data Logging Software admin Project B1 File Edit View Project Operation User Help Htc wie te amp Alel a ee Hl cood N Device ES Data time PC time amp Pre set mark DN Tag v Monitor Interval 1 Second No String A isplay v L 3 pare Gi m aE _ _ a M ee Acauisition amp pnitor V lt 5 Monitor Data Set Number 2 Resize the Monitor Set ON O OFF iy Record Split Screen Direction Horizontal e Alarm Shape O O o a Set Number in Spliting Direction 1 Alarm Color orr i on E Eq Emai Split Screen Data Set B No Split Screen Data Set ret Access amp Others 1 Trend amp 2_ Diqital C2 EES x 1 Select Acquisition amp Monitor in the navigation area on the left of the window The Acquisition amp Monitor Page appears 2 Set the data acquisition conditions namely the type of timestamps to attach to data and acquisition interval 3 Configure the Monitor Page monitor type layout etc The Acquisition amp Monitor Page is divided into two areas an area for setting data acquisition conditions and another for configuring the monitor The details of each are provided in the following pages Use the letters a to j in the figure to reference the corresponding desc
2. 3 Click the arrows of alarm Level 1 to Level 4 and select the changes in the alarm levels Options On Off On Off Default value 4 To apply the selections click OK To cancel click Cancel The dialog box closes and the Email Event Setting Page returns 3 33 Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording Trigger Display When Send Condition Is Set to Comm Status Condition O Alarm Status Comm Status O Specified Period O Specified Duration O File is created TRIG Communication Disconnect Communication Recover Loss Data Trigger Display When Send Condition Is Set to Specified Period Condition Alarm Status Comm Status Specified Period Specified Duration File is created TRIG Everyday Absolute Time 00 00 00 Trigger Display When Send Condition Is Set to Specified Duration Condition Alarm Status Comm Status O Specified Period Specified Duration File is created TRIG 00 01 00 When Send Condition Is Set to File is created No trigger display Condition O Alarm Status Comm Status O Specified Period O Specified Duration File is created 5 Sending Basic Settings Enter the following sending basic settings You can specify up to 10 email addresses for Sent to and CC Sent from Sender email addresses Sent to Recipient email addresses CC Carbon copy email addresses Title Subject of the email
3. Bice wih Bie gt e zz e 9 Device v m e Manager a Operator Nw Monitor 2 a Tas v z 3S g w E oway v SH Record v M 3 Dg Emai v 2 za Access amp Others 7 B fe I I I ll x User List 2 sert A User2 Ba User3 2 er4 2 Users 2 User7 2 r8 po All Users Others Keep Lock State O ON OFF DDE Server O ON OFF LZOR You can change how the users are displayed between User Name and User Full Name by clicking User Display Form on the View menu CLA IM 04L65B01 01EN 4 Drag the appropriate user to the appropriate privilege area Data Logging Software admin Project B1 File Edit View Project Operation User Help E S weet B e e Jo p a a oo om 5 E i Manager Operator Monitor popia v i Ll gt privileges privileges privileges It DJ Emai v Z za Access amp Others z a B User list Others Keep Lock State O ON OFF DDE Server O ON OFF 5 Or select the user and click the Move button pointing to the appropriate privilege area Move button I Ce User3 2 User6 2 User7 S Users 2 All Users The user moves to the specified privilege area The user can now perform the granted operations in
4. eS A en Pee st er oe crt ame _rapcnmes__ _ e bt m0001 0014 Device 0001 TagComment0001 SHORT 4 001 Device 0002 TagComment0002 SHORT 4 O 001 Device Ww 0003 TagComment0003 SHORT 4 ww O 001 Device amp 0004 TagComment0004 SHORT W W 4 Ww o 001 Device Ww 0005 TagComment0005 SHORT 4 Ww m 001 Device amp 0006 TagComment0006 SHORT 4 w o 001 Device Ww 0007 TagComment0007 SHORT Ww 4 w O 001 Device amp 0008 TagComment0008 SHORT 4 ww The tag settings are explained below 1 Monitor tag index These are unique tag numbers assigned sequentially starting with 0001 You cannot change the numbers Click the boxes to specify whether to enable data monitoring 2 Record Click the boxes to specify whether to enable data recording 3 Device Specify the names of the devices to assign to the tags 4 Channel Specify the channels to assign to the tags Clicking a button displays a separate window Select a channel number to apply it to the sheet 5 Tag No and Tag Comment Enter aliases for the tags as tag numbers and tag comments Specify up to 16 characters for tag numbers and 32 characters for tag comments You can select which name to display Tag Index Tag No or Tag Comment to suit your purpose To select which name to display on the View menu click Tag Display Form 6 Type Specify the tag data types Click the arrows and select from the following data types
5. s Record Data the software for data collection and recording Configuring and Starting Explains two configuration modes for data collection 3 Data Collection and and recording with GA10 Simple Settings and Detail Recording Settings 4 Monitoring Data Explains how to use the Monitor Page to monitor Collection data collection 5 Managing Recording Explains how to edit recording data files from a list Data and how to display recording data files on a viewer Explains how to register delete and edit information of users that will perform data collection and recording with GA10 6 Managing Users OPC UA Server 7 Function UA option Explains the OPC UA server function UA option Provides messages that GA10 may display and how to deal with them as well as answers to frequently asked questions 8 Troubleshooting Scope of This Manual This manual does not explain the operations of your PC s operating system For this information read the Windows user s guide or related materials Conventions Used in This Manual Notes Identifies important information required to A IMPORTANT understand operations or functions Note Calls attention to information that is important for the proper operation of GA10 Reference Item p Reference to related operation or explanation is indicated after this mark Example p section 4 1 Conventions Used in the Procedural Explanations Bold characters ndicates charact
6. Monitor set boundary Monitorsets Maximize icon e Resizing the Monitor Set To resize the Monitor Set Resize the Monitor Set on the Acquisition amp Monitor Setting page must be set to On Move the pointer near the boundary of the Monitor Set to change the pointer to t or lt gt In this condition drag the pointer to move the boundary to the desired position e Maximizing the Monitor Set Click the Maximize icon E in the upper right of the Monitor Set to expand the Monitor Set to fill the entire window Click Fa to return to its original size e Switching the Display Group at Once On the View menu click Group Link Or click the icon on the toolbar When you change the display group of one Monitor Set the display group of other Monitor Sets also changes To cancel linking on the View menu click Group Link to unselect it Or click the icon on the toolbar to unselect it 4 1 3 Setting General Display Options Tag Display Form From the list of options that appears when you click Tag Display Form on the View menu select the items to display as tags This applies to all pages User Display Form From the list of options that appears when you click User Display Form on the View menu select the items to display as user names This applies to all pages Screen Background Color On the View menu click Style and click Light or Dark to select the background color This applies to all pages Date Fo
7. DeviceXXX Data of each device Object Device Status Device status information Object Status Registered device status Variable Int32 1 normal 2 error Model Name Registered device name Variable String ex DX1000 GX20 Serial Number Registered device serial number Variable String ex X5G905023 Math_GA10 Math tag data Object Channel Data Channel data Object ChannelName_XXX 2 Data of each channel Object String Data Measured value Variable Float ex 123 4 EURange Upper and lower range limits Variable Range ex 10 10 ExtensionObject EngineeringUnits Unit Variable EUInformation ex ExtensionObject InstrumentRange Upper and lower range limits Variable Range ex 11 11 display boundaries ExtensionObject All Alarm Status Status of all alarms Variable Boolean true alarm ON false alarm OFF Alarm Status 1to4 Status of each alarm Variable Boolean true alarm ON false alarm OFF 1 All nodes are read only 2 Tag name and tag comment are displayed in the description of ChannelName_XXxX IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 7 OPC UA Server Function UA option IM 04L65B01 01EN 7 1 3 Server Certificate Operations This function can be used to perform the following server certificate operations For the actual procedure see 7 1 Installation Installs the certificate file that the user has prepared in GA10 to make it an OPC UA server certificate The certificate must be generated from an int
8. a E SMARTDAC Report Template Builder RepTempSample_C_1page tpl PPAF EE ERV REA FUTL EC NLI H lL la amp neun n smsexerarzQqaa AEG EEE a a a aaa aT aaa an Aa aaa aera ay GENRFIRDD aL Kr eS mm Y 32 2 mm te 168 0 mm fei 79 1 fmm ExtGraph G1 sane ORISA SO CE Es og elelaln 4 E For the keywords that you can use see Creating Report Templates for Report Files in Excel Format App 9 IM 04L51B01 01EN ss Bia eee Index A Access Privileges idusaicisnentenidiabianianistadidatdiaiaatariakatidaladareaareite 3 38 AOP Gen E E 1 7 4 1 4 10 Acquisition amp Monitor Page c c ccsssccccssssssseeeeseenssseeeeeees 3 23 Administrator aaiccccicisecacextscnsendesdicandowsdeosnesdasetnentoussmwasenees 2 4 6 1 Alann IMPOR ANON 426322 ccissis auncasedtseatacasanaaseateadieateantanestacessasecientts 4 8 Alarm Occurrence DISPLAY sciiicccsicvecctsassanvenctsiasvannsencasssncronnens 4 8 AI USES serren Ra EE E Ea EE Nai 3 39 Assigning Tags Automatically ccccecesseeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeees 3 22 EEN Ea E AEE AA ET E A E 3 57 B gt PACK Ml s cisdere enean E nEn 1 3 3 24 4 14 8 6 8 7 8 11 C E EEEE E AOT 7 3 certificate signing request ccccseseeees 7 3 7 8 7 11 8 5 RV EN E tae A E E E E E E E 1 1 2 9 Collectively Editing Ta QS eciriaissiesrecnstenceeaccnassntanctentencenactanteasn 3 18 COPAT Seen
9. User s SMART Manual Model GA10 GA10CL GA10UP Data Logging Software User s Manual vigilantplant YOKOGAWA IM 04L65B01 01EN Yokogawa Electric Corporation 4th Edition Introduction This manual explains how to use Data Logging Software GA10 hereafter referred to as GA10 To ensure correct use please read this manual thoroughly before beginning operation Downloading Manuals You can download the latest user s manuals from the fol lowing URL www smartdacplus com manual en e Electronic Manuals this manual and related manuals Manual Title Manual No Model GA10 GA10CL GA10UP Data Logging Software User s Manual this manual IM 04L65B01 01EN SMARTDAC STANDARD Universal Viewer User s Manual IM 04L61B01 01EN e Paper Manuals manuals supplied with the product Manual Title Manual No GA10 Data Logging Software Downloading the Latest Software and Manuals mao ee eee Updating the Software Download the latest version of the software from the fol lowing URL www smartdacplus com software en Notes e The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the software s performance and functions e Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKO
10. Value Enter the constant value e Default value 0 e Input range 3 4028235E 38 to 3 4028235E 38 e Value s displayed number of decimal places The number of displayed decimal places is undefined the number of significant numeric digits is seven When necessary it is displayed in exponential form to match the display of the actual value e g 1 234E12 Predefined Math Constant The following table shows the predefined math constants Constant Name Description Label NaN Undefined or error value POver Overrange MOver Overrange Pi Tr 3 14 e Base of natural logarithm 2 718 Numeric Math Constant To express a constant by entering a number directly in an expression use the following syntax digits digits d D e E digits Example 1 0d 1 represents 10 0 Available Operators The following operators can be used in expressions Operator Description Unary plus operator Unary minus operator Logical negation operator 1 if 0 otherwise 0 Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Remainder lt Less than 1 if true 0 if false gt Greater than 1 if true O if false lt Less than or equal to 1 if true 0 if false gt Greater than or equal to 1 if true O if false Equal to 1 if true 0 if false Not equal to 1 if true O if false amp amp Logical AND continue calculation even
11. After registering the device set the Monitor and record interval and the measurement data save destination 2 Monitor Record Interval 1 Second Folder C Users PubliciDocument SMARTDAC Data Logging Software Data Project A1 Click to select the interval Click to select the save destination Choose the interval from the Monitor Record Interval list at the bottom of the page Name Default Value Options Monitor Record 1 Second 100 Millisecond 200 Millisecond Interval 500 Millisecond 1 Second 2 Second 5 Second 10 Second 20 Second 30 Second 1 Minute 2 Minute 5 Minute 10 Minute Click Refer to and select the directory for saving recording files Me WE e The Refer to button for specifying the save destination folder is available only when the server and client are installed in the same PC e We recommend you use the default setting for the data save destination folder See Folder on page 3 30 vivid ddd psddsssdcccacccdddddddcddcaddcadaddaddddddddddddddadada 3 2 4 Starting Data Monitoring and Recording Click the icons that are displayed on the tab on the right side of the screen to collect or start and stop recording t Standby 8 Monitoring Recording Start Monitoring P gt Stop Monitoring I Starts data monitoring Click again to stop Under monitoring Start Recording gt Stop Recording I Starts data monitoring and recording to the data file at the same tim
12. Import tags from tag information tag message file 3 18 Export tags Export tags from tag information tag message file 3 18 Start DDE Start DDE service 3 40 Stop DDE Stop DDE service 3 40 Exit Exit application Edit p Copy Ctrl C Copy the selection and put it on the Clipboard 3 8 Paste Ctrl V Paste the copied content 3 8 _ Delete Delete Delete the selected content 3 3 6 4 View gg Project List Page Switch to Project list page 2 53 63 424 16 4 g User Management Page Switch to user management page 2 4 6 2 Log Display log dialogue 4 15 z Refresh Update the current page 5 2 Alarm Show or hide alarm 4 5 Alarm List Show alarm list dialogue 4 8 es Group Link Linkage shows when switching between different groups 4 2 Cursor value Open the Cursor Window 4 5 Cursor Value Transparency gt Switch cursor value transparency 4 5 Erase Cursor Erase Cursor 4 5 Tag Display From gt Switch tag display format 4 2 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 1 Before Using the Product Menu Description See pages User Display Form gt Switch user display format 4 2 Style gt Switch the display style 2 3 4 2 Date Format gt Switch the date format 4 2 Month Display Form gt Switch the month display format 4 2 Decimal Point gt Switch the decimal point 4 2 Tool Bar Show or hide the tool bar Mark Bar Show or hide the mark bar Warning Action Bar Show or hide the waring action bar
13. Language M gt Switch the language English Japanese German French Chinese 2 10 Korean Russian Project Open with specified permission Open the project according to the specified permission 6 4 Modify Basic Information Modify project s basic information 3 8 Modify Owner Modify project s owner 6 4 Append Mark gt Append mark to the current group or all groups 4 6 Reset Computing Reset computing on the server when math tags are enabled on GA10 3 56 with the MT option Start Device s Computing Start computing in the devices used in the Project 4 13 Stop Device s Computing Stop computing in the devices used in the Project 4 13 Reset Device s Computing Reset computing in the devices used in the Project 4 13 Reset amp Start Device s Reset and start computing in the devices used in the Project 4 13 Computing Alarm ACK Alarm ACK 4 10 Update Tag Information Updates the selected tag information manually 3 19 rey Assign Tag Automatically Assign tags automatically 3 22 Fait Sorting Tags in Order of the Sort tags in order by device number 3 15 Device No Unlock Project Forcibly Change the project s lock state forcibly 6 5 Operation ly Start Monitoring Simultaneously All opened Projects start monitoring simultaneously 3 42 an Stop Monitoring Simultaneously All opened Projects stop monitoring simultaneously 3 42 a Start Recording Simultaneously All opened Projects start recording simul
14. Report templates for PDF report files tpl are created using SMARTDAC Report Template Builder Report Template Builder can be downloaded from the following URL for free www smartdacplus com software en In Report Template Builder keywords text and images JPG PNG BMP are arranged in tables graphs and text components to create report templates Keywords specify the type of data that will be entered into a cell Text are output as they are in reports Jy INARI e iepr erpi be e Bast a ec fer fi pea Beet orem erpin Help SMART F R2 Report i mer File narma SFileHeaders Dane Date Times lBaten number Channel Number SCHIROOTS SCAIROOT S SCHIROGS SCHIRON S SCHi Narre Tark 1 tempera Tark 1 tempera Nod VoRage Nod rpm No5 e Unit SuntROOTS SUnAR0O2S SUmROIS SUMAIROM S SUnit RepartLiataTim ReportDatalnat SReponDataini RepoetDatalne ReportDatalnl Rep SRepeatS SRepeatS SRepears SRepeats Repeats SRepeatS SRepeatS Repeats SRepestS Repeats Repeats SRepeath Repeatd RepeatS SRepeat3 Repeats Receats SRepaat SRepestS SRepeati SRepeats SRepeats SRepeatt SRepeatS SRepeats RepeatS RepeatS SRepeats Repeats Repeat SRepeats SRepeath SRepeatt Repeat Repeath App 8 IM 04L51B01 01EN Appendix 1 Creating Report Templates To insert a graph in a template click the Graph for GA10 icon ie and enter the keyword ExtGraph G1
15. You can select which setting mode to use when you create a project If you select Simple Settings you can change to Detail Settings while you are configuring a new project but you cannot change from Detail Settings to Simple Settings Device connection s Project configuration Detail Settings Page Pe i Ch bl Simple Settings a PPP eee eee ae ir Simple Settings Page ta Pad aAnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnas aa N g Server Setting Acquisition amp Monitor 3 UA option P Data collection and recording Report Print math tag and OPC UA server Setting Pages appear on GA10 that have the corresponding options Builpiooay pue UO DAIJOD ezeq Buiezs pue Buin zuo Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recordin 3 2 Easy Configuration Simple Settings This section explains how to configure the settings in Simple Settings mode before starting data collection In Simple Settings mode you can simply use drag amp drop operation to register the devices that you want to connect to To customize the settings and start data collection page 3 6 3 2 1 Creating a Project in Simple Settings Mode 1 Start GA10 and log in by typing the user name and password 2 On the File menu click New Project The Create New Project dialog box appears 3 Type the project name and comment Leave Settings Mode at Simple Settings Create Hew project el Project
16. lt hour A gt lt minute A gt and lt day of week B gt lt hour B gt lt minute B gt every week daily lt hour gt lt minute gt Edge action at lt hour gt lt minute gt every day bfDaily lt hour gt lt minute gt Previous edge action at lt hour gt lt minute gt every day daily lt hour A gt lt minute A gt lt hour B gt lt minute B gt Level action between time A and B every day hourly lt minute gt Edge action at lt minute gt every hour bfHourly lt minute gt Previous edge action at lt minute gt every hour hourly lt minute A gt lt minute B gt Level action between minute A and B every hour e Edge Returns 1 0 at the time of computation immediately after the specified duration or time e Previous edge Returns 1 0 at the time of computation immediately before the specified duration or time e Level Returns 1 0 during the specified duration or time e Parameter setting range lt year gt 1970 to 2036 lt month gt 1 to 12 lt day gt 1 to 31 lt day of week gt 0 to 6 0 Sunday 1 Monday 6 Saturday lt hour gt 0 to 23 lt minute gt 0 to 59 3 55 Builpiooay pue UO DAIJOD ejyeg Hulyieyg pue Hulsnbyuoy Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 5 2 Performing Computations Computation starts when data collection starts Click the k icon displayed on the tab on the right side of the screen
17. 2 Select a tag to use 1 line 1 tag 1 math tag Click the check boxes in the Acquisition amp Computing or Record column 3 Set the expressions and the like of the math tags you want to use Details of settings Next page 3 50 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording You can set the following items for math tags Math Tag a meas A0001 TAG 0001 2 ww 100 00 100 00 Const1 1 TAG 0001 2 w 100 00 100 00 2 L TAG 0001 2 100 00 100 00 0 C TAG 0001 2 2 100 00 100 00 0 L TAG 0001 2 100 00 100 00 0 C TAG 0001 2 100 00 100 00 0 L TAG 0001 2 x 100 00 100 00 0 C TAG 0001 2 w 100 00 100 00 0 1 Acquisition amp Computing Math Tag Index These are unique tag numbers assigned sequentially from A0001 to A0200 You cannot change the numbers Click to specify whether to acquire and compute Blue is on record 2 Record Click to specify whether to record save the math data If you set Record to On Acquisition amp Computing will also be automatically set to On 3 Expression Set the expression If the expression that you enter is invalid it will be displayed with red characters e Default value TAG 0001 e Input range Enter a text string using up to 127 characters Constants and functions are not case sensitive Available operators and functions gt page 3 53 4 Dec Point Select the
18. No Yes 34150 software from a list DR130 Gamea Yes No Yes 34150 3 Comm Select from the list Ethernet Select the interface DR230 left Yes No Yes 34150 Kind Selectable range from the list Ethernet Serial If Device Type is aoe ae oe USB But depends MX100 MW100 5 on the model DAQLOGGER GX20 Saneas Yes No Yes 34434 DAQ32Plus GP10 2 left Yes No Yes 34434 MXLOGGER or GP20 2 Yes No Yes 34434 3 GateWT this is fixed GM10 3 Yes Yes Yes 34434 to Ethernet UT32A Yes No Yes 502 USB is selectable UT35A Yes No Yes 502 only when Device UT52A Yes No Yes 502 Type is GM10 UT55A Same as Yes No Yes 502 4 Host Enter text Blank This appears only UT75A left Yes No Yes 502 name Input range up to when Comm Kind is UP35A Yes No Yes 502 IP 255 alphanumeric set to Ethernet UP55A Yes No Yes 502 address __ characters UM33A Yes No Yes 502 5 User Enter text Admin Customer information DAQLOGGER No No Yes 50280 4 Name Input range up to items appear in the DAQ32Plus Same as No No Yes 502784 63 alphanumeric following conditions MXLOGGER i No No Yes 502844 characters When Comm Kind GateWT for GA10 Sameas No No Yes 502954 IS SB tD Eerme left and Device Type is Modbus protocol Loe aaa compatible devices US e YOKOGAWA hardware Yes No Yes 502 MXLOGGER control instruments GateWT or a 1 Yes Supported No Not supported Modbus device l 2 The GX GP version R1 03 03 and later supports auto searching on an When C
19. OFF Indicates that an alarm has been released e Changing Alarm Types during Data Collection and Recording If alarm types including use and not use are changed on the connected device side during data collection recording or record standby the changes are reflected on the alarm monitor The changes are reflected in the following areas IM 04L65B01 01EN e Digital alarm and meter monitor sets e Alarm display of the value display area in the cursor value dialog box e Alarm list display Changes in alarm types are not reflected in the alarm list of the recording file Further this applies only when the connected device is a SMARTDAC t series GX GP GM device and the GA10 version is R2 02 xx or later UOI DIIJOD eyeg Bunoyuow Chapter 4 Monitoring Data Collection 4 6 Checking Alarms 4 6 1 Displaying the Alarm Overview Dialog Box While displaying the Monitor Page click Alarm list List on the View menu to display the alarm overview dialog box The displayed content and operation in this dialog box are the same as those of the alarm list of the alarm Monitor Set Click in the upper right of the dialog box to close it e Page Switching and Dialog Box Display The dialog box stays open until you close it If you move to another page with the dialog box open the dialog box disappears But if you return to the Monitor Page the dialog box will appear again If you change the project while the
20. Tag 0003 0 9079 Tag 0002 0 4158 T o Aloo beL gt Frag 0001 Frag 0001 0 1046 0 0785 ENTE laleo00 6e 1 Alpooo Be Tag 0002 0 5930 ray 0003 1 0672 T T 14 45 00 14 T 14 41 00 l2013711718 Absolute Time h m s e Cursor Value Transparency On the View menu click Cursor value transparency to choose Transparent or Opaque e Reading the Difference between Two Cursors On the View menu click Cursor value The Cursor Value dialog box appears From this dialog box you can read the difference between cursors A and B Click the cursor move icon S to move the cursor by 1 data point Alarm indicator Cursor movement icon B 1945 amp C i 2013 11 18 2013 11 18 14 39 23 000 14 39 23 000 alue alue alue alu F 4 5 UOI DIIJOD ezeq Bunoyuow ba Chapter 4 Monitoring Data Collection Data No A sequence number of collected data points taking the first collected data point to be zero Alarm indicator The status of alarm level 1 alarm level 2 alarm level 3 and alarm level 4 are displayed from the left Displayed Content Description Red Green Alarm occurrence Alarm release Gray Alarm not set When Alarm in the View menu is not checked alarm indicators are not shown To close the cursor value dialog box click the icon in the upp
21. _Siit _ brain write Display 10 1 32 123 K E ua 2 2 C 006 10 1 32 86 10 1 32 123 10 1 32 86 10 1 32 124 10 1 32 115 M Dg EMail 2 ig Accessaotners B __ 6 x Comm Kind i Ethernet Serial 7 im me Device Name Device Meas Ch E Device Type GXt0 Math ch Setting button Version No R2 01 94 Ctrl Ch Comm Address 10 1 32 86 Extra Ch E Device information display area Online Devices List Displays information of the selected device Online devices over Ethernet or serial communication Device icons shown in the following figure display the devices information These icons are used to register and delete devices between the Devices List Registered Devices List and Online Devices List Device number displayed only on the Devices List Frame turns blue Model name 00 DX2000 Devicee Device name Device icon HEN 10 1 32 85 Communication address Displays the host name or IP address Selected Not selected Basic Operation 1 Search for devices connected to the network Click Search in the Online Devices List The connected devices will appear 2 Register devices Select the icon of the device that you want to register to the project and drag it to the Devices List or click I lt in the center of the page If the device is already shown in the Registered Devices List you can register it in the same manner 3 For a device that is not automatically detected in step 1
22. n i gt Extended Standard 4 Click OK to close the dialog box Choose DLGServer On the Action menu click Stop to stop the server Double click DLGServer The DLGServer Properties appear QUA G m DLGServer Properties Local Computer X J General Log On Recovery Dependencies Service name DLGServer Display name DLGServer Description e Data Logging Software Server a Path to executable C Proeram Files Yokogawa Electric Corporation SMARTDAC Data Logging Startup type automatic Help me configure service startup options Service status Started Start Pause Resume You can specify the start parameters that apply when you start the service from here Start parameter IM 04L65B01 01EN 2 7 Chapter 2 Preparation 8 9 In Startup parameters type the following character string PORT Number Specify the new port number in Number Specify the port number in the range of 1025 to 65535 excluding 50311 General Log On Recovery Dependencies Service name DLGServer Display name OLGServer Description SMARTDAG Data Logging Software Server Path to executable C Program Files Yokogawa Electric Corporation SMARTDAC Data Logging Startup type Automatic x Help me configure service startup options Service status Stopped Stop Pause Resume You can specify the start parameters
23. 4 1c m0006 o 001 Device 9 0006 VI006 0006 LONG 4 w amp Hecera v m0007 001 Device 9 0007 Vi007 0007 LONG 4 m0008 o 001 Device 0008 vi008 0008 LONG 4 1c RZ E Mail m0009 o 001 Device 0009 vVI009 0009 LONG 4 m0010 o 001 Device 9 0010 Vvi010 0010 LONG mw 4 w ret m0011 o 001 Device 0101 VI011 0011 BOOL amp o0 amp eens m jooi2 001 Device vio12 0012 BOOL O0 m0013 001 Device n0103 VI013 0013 BOOL 0 m0014 o 001 Device 9 0104 vi014 0014 BOOL 0 3 A Tag Setting Page opens Select the tags you want to update Tag Sp Device vi 7 Monitor Record Device Channel Tag No Tag Comment Type Dec Point H a Tag lt m0001 001 Device 0001 VI001 0001 LONG amp 4 m0002 ml 001 Device M __0002__ VI002 0002 LONG 4 m0003 001 Device 0003 _ vI003 0003 L wo 8 Display m0004 ml 001 Device vioo4 0004 LONG 4 m0005 001 Device amp vi005 0005 LONG 4 A Record m0006 fl 001 Device m0006 VI006 0006 LONG 4 gt wio007 001 Device amp Vi007 0007 LONG 4 mooos Ml 001 Device 0003 vioos 0008 LONG 4 D Email mo0o09 Ml 001 Device M0009 vioog 0009 LONG 4 m0010 Ml 001 Device 0010 vio10 0010 LONG 4 ka Access amp Others w 50011 001 Device 0101 V011 001
24. Data Type Description ANY Any data type BOOL Boolean SHORT 2 byte signed integer USHORT 2 byte unsigned integer LONG 4 byte signed integer ULONG 4 byte unsigned integer FLOAT 4 byte single precision floating point number FLOAT LOG Data type for LOG input channels 1 LOG Old Data type for LOG input channels DXAdvanced series LOG Data type for LOG input channels FX1000 series IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording Refer to the following table for the data types of the channels on data source devices Model Channel Type Data Type DAQLOGGER All channels Undefined LONG FLOAT or DAQ32Plus LOG MXLOGGER Measurement channels excluding DI LONG GX GP Shek channels communication channels GM channels l BOOL Measurement channel whose input type is LOG 1 FLOAT LOG Excluding the above Same as Other Devices defined using Modbus All channels Data types of registers defined device definition files in the Modbus device definition file are retained and used for displaying and recording Data type mapping table page 3 45 Other Measurement channels SHORT Math channel LONG Control channel SHORT Extra channel SHORT Math channel whose input is LOG LOG 1 For GX GP firmware version R2 01 or later with the Log scale option LG 7 Dec Point Specify the number of decimal places for tags Click the arrows to select the number of digits 0 to 5 Selec
25. Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters ASCII except for the control characters for the user name BBEBB_fullname Cancel 5 Click OK The user is registered and an icon is added in the window 6 To add more users repeat the procedure above Registered users will be able to log in set their passwords and perform their assigned tasks Mle WE User names are case sensitive When logging in enter the user name exactly as it was registered Vi hdd dddsisccccccccddddddddddcdaddaaadadddddddddddddddadadaaddde Differences between the administrator and users and changing and deleting users gt page 6 1 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 2 Preparation 2 6 Creating a Project After logging in to the server create a project to manage data collection and recording You can create a project in one of the following ways e Create a new project You can create a new data collection project e Export and import You can export and import a project e Copy and paste You can duplicate an existing project This section explains how to create a new project using Simple Settings 1 Switch from the User Management Page to the Project List page On the View menu click Project List Page Or click the BE icon Switch to Project List page E B User2 3 User3 ull Na CCCC_fulin User Full Na The Project List Page appears The first page that appears when you log in is the Project
26. IM 04L65B01 01EN 4 2 4 Showing and Hiding Waveforms Using the Legend The legend can be displayed in tag display mode or axis display mode Each time you click the display mode icon the mode toggles between tag display and axis display Tag display mode Axis display mode Display mode icon J Tag 0001 Za Tao 0001 A M Tag 0002 A Tag 0001 A E Tag 0003 A M Tao 0002 A E Tag 0004 Tag 0003 V Tag 0004 V la E Tag 0004 Click to display tags Axis check icon Tag name Tag color Waveform check icon e Tag Display Mode The tags assigned to the display group are displayed Waveforms whose waveform check icons are selected are shown If you click an icon to clear the check box the waveform will be hidden e Axis Display Mode A list of Y axes used by tags is displayed Expand a Y axis to display a list of tags that are using the Y axis If you click an Y axis check icon to clear the check box the axis and waveform data sharing the axis will be hidden 4 2 5 Viewing the Alarm Occurrence Status When you click Alarm on the View menu to add a check mark alarm bars are displayed in the alarm display area Remove the check mark to hide the alarm bars Alarm bar x 2 f i 14 30 00 14 35 00 14 40 00 14 45 00 14 50 Absolute Time h m s Emin The bars show the data range in which alarms are occurring for the tags displayed in the group The alarms are from the top al
27. If the displayed information is correct click OK To reselect a different device click Cancel If the security settings on the device being registered are enabled you need to enter the user information for accessing the device Otherwise you can leave the user information blank and click OK Not the user privileges for GA10 Registe device Deivce Name Device Deivce Type DX2000 Device information Comm Kind Ethernet Communication Host Name P Address 10132 parameters User information The DX is added to the Device List Note Yamuna e Ifa login is required for communicating with the device you need to specify the user information Check the user name user ID and password for the device and enter them e When connecting to a DXAdvanced DX1000 DX1000N DX1000T DX2000 or DX2000T with the AS1 advanced security option through the Ethernet interface log in as an administrator to access the DX In this situation only one administrator will be able to log in Sia E AENT IM 04L65B01 01EN Data Logging Software admin Project_A1 File Edit View Project Operation User Help Ht wo amp amp 2 e F F a ae Ea a gt eo a 2 001 DX2000 002 003 004 d Comm Kind m Ethernet Serial Click to start gt a Mv1000 DXx1000 D am A s E EA 10 C 000 i
28. The page will be divided and the lists will be displayed separately at the device level Filling data dropouts If data collection is set to Device time mode the backfill function can be used What is the backfill function Q4 Mail transmission function In the email transmission based on alarm occurrence and release the software monitors relevant tags for each device and for each data collection interval to transmit email In the email transmission based on the specified period the software sends email for each device and for each data collection interval In the email transmission based on the specified duration the software calculates the duration and sends email for each device and for each data collection interval 8 11 Buljooyusajqnoiy ss Bia eee Appendix Appendix1 Creating Report Templates Creating Report Templates for Report Files in Excel Format To create a report template enter keywords and text in the cells of an Excel file Keywords specify the type of data that will be entered into a cell Text are output as they are in reports Save the report templates that you create in Excel format xlsx extension or Excel macro format xlsm extension Function See page App 1 in section 1 12 Using the Report Template Function MT option Setup See page App 1 in section 1 11 Configuring the Report Function MT option Loading and saving report templates See page App 1 in section 1 12 5
29. The project is pasted in the list NOE Yammmmnaaaae e The copied project is retained until you log out e When you import or paste a project if the original file is on the list a serial number starting with 001 is added to the original project name A Renaming a project To rename a project follow the procedure below 1 From the list of projects select the project that you want to rename 2 On the Project menu click Modify Basic Information A Change project s Basic Information dialog box appears 3 Type the new project name or comment Change project s Basic Information x Project s Name Project_A Comment Nov 19 th Name changed 4 When you are finished click OK The project name will change New name 3 8 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 3 2 Registering Devices to Connect After you create a project register the devices to collect and record data from The Device Setting Page that you use to register devices is composed of the following four areas Devices List Registered Devices List Data collection devices Devices registered in the server B Data Logging Software admin Project B1 File Edit View Project Operation User Help E 3 a2 wo wh XIB vee vs 00 i 002 px i Ethernet E Serial S Tag ei f
30. Up to the specified time on the specified Custom Print 1 day Day 1st to 31st day of the condition 0 00 00 to Hour 00 to 23 The maximum time between start and end is 31 Current Minute 00 to 59 days Month Second 00 to 59 Start Time lt End Time Standard Print Custom 1 day Print Report Output 0 00 00 If a day that does not exist in the relevant month e g 31st 30th or 29th is specified it is corrected to the last day of the month Daily Prev Same as above Start Time Time on the day of the week of Monthly Month Condition in Prev Week or later Report 1 day End Time Up to the time on the day of the week of 0 00 00 to Condition in Current Week Current The maximum time between start and end is 7 Month days 1 day Start Time lt End Time Standard Print Custom 0 00 00 Print Report Output If a day that does not exist in the relevant month e g 31st 30th or 29th is specified it is corrected to the last day of the month Not split even the time spans over two months Example Daily Monthly output data time Condition 25th of every month 01 30 00 Range 25th of Prev Month 01 30 00 to 25th of Current Month 01 30 00 Data times will take on the following values Daily data yyyymm26 01 30 00 yyyymm2 7 01 30 00 yyyymm01 01 30 00 yyyymm24 01 30 00 yyyymm25 01 30 00 Monthly data yyyymmdd 01 30 00 3 73 Bulpiooay pue UO DAIJOD ejyeg Hulyieyg pue Hulsnbyuoy Chapter 3 Configuring and Sta
31. and symbols Up to 64 characters Prohibited characters amp 3 Click OK A self signed certificate is created If creation fails an error E3072 will appear M8 WCC e Ifa character string that you enter exceeds the limit it is truncated within the limit e Issuer information and subject information will be the same Li siisdddddddddcdddddddddaddddaaddddddaadddddddaaddddddadddddddadddddddddddddddadddddddadaddddddaddddddddddddddddadddda IM 04L65B01 01EN 7 9 Chapter 7 OPC UA Server Function UA option The following table shows the items and descriptions of the self signed certificate that is created Item Name Description Version V3 Serial No Auto generation Signature Algorithm ShaiRSA Signature Hash Algorithm Sha Issuer Country Setting entered in the dialog box Issuer State Same as above Issuer City Same as above Issuer Organization Same as above Issuer Organization unit Same as above Issuer Common name Same as above Issuer E Mail address Same as above Valid from PC time when the certificate was created Valid to 2037 12 1 21 00 00 Subject Country Setting entered in the dialog box Subject State Same as above Subject City Same as above Subject Organization Same as above Subject Organization unit Same as above Subject Common name Same as above Subject E Mail address Same as above 1 Generated automatically from the server
32. box shown below If the Math function MT option is installed you can also select math tags Tag 0011 tenting Graph 1 to 4 Print Type Select the type of graph defined in the template file e Options None Trend Graph Alarm List Mark List Range From the start time of the first file to the end time of the last file in the selected data file list Group Specify the number of the group to print Select the number of the group to print from the Group 01 to 50 options Printout Setup Same as Printout Setup on page 3 63 5 8 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 6 Managing Users 6 1 Administrator and Users In GA10 you can set server access privileges There are two types of server access privileges administrator and user The administrator manages all users The administrator can perform the following operations in addition to all the operations available to users e Register users e Delete users e Initialize user passwords e View the login status of users The following sections explain how to use the User Management Page Registration AJA d foes user Server Administrator View A User x 2 View a gt UserA Logged in D Logged in 2 Delete iew Initialize password La gt User B User C Not logged in View oa Note that at the GA10 project level users can be assigned one of four project access privileges Owner Manager Operator and Monitor These privileges
33. not displayed Alarm indicator e Most Recent Alarm Tag name l l The top line always displays the most recent entry Data Logging Software admin Projectl res eo qs User i a mae I e Alarm List t _ The history of alarms are displayed in the order of Tag 0001 LEE R0002 occurrence Move the scroll bar down to view past alarms This condition is called playback mode In Tag 0003 Tag 0004 playback mode the history is not automatically updated E 5 the line showing the most recent alarm is automatically Tag 0005 Tag 0006 ul updated Move the scroll bar to its top position to exit H playback mode Tag 0007 Tag 0008 L Alarm Status Icon Tag 0009 Tag 0010 Indication Description H Alarm on color Alarm occurrence l Alarm off color Alarm release The alarm colors specified on the Acquisition amp Monitor page e Alarm Occurrence Display If ACK has not been executed the icon background blinks Alarm occurrence is displayed in the alarm color in the tag display area e Alarm Indicator The status of alarm level 1 alarm level 2 alarm level 3 and alarm level 4 are displayed from the left Tag alarm status is indicated in the alarm color 4 8 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 4 Monitoring Data Collection e Alarm Type Icons Displayed Content Description High limit alarm measurement high limit alarm deviation high limit alarm setting high
34. selected in the list If the entire file name cannot be displayed the end is abbreviated with ellipses Template File Displays the name of template file selected from the server or the local PC If the entire file name cannot be displayed the end is abbreviated with ellipses Server Select this to use a template file registered in GA10 Registered templates will be displayed in a list Template File dialog box Local Click this to use a template file from a PC An standard Open dialog box will appear Printer Displays a list of registered printers Select a printer on the server side that will be used Network printers are not displayed Select a local printer registered on the server PC Output Language Specify the language for the printed materials The date format and decimal point format vary depending on the language Display format of each language gt Language vs Date Format and Decimal Point Format on page 3 64 IM 04L65B01 01EN IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 5 Managing Recording Data Graph 1 to 4 Print Type Select the type of graph defined in the template file e Options None Trend Graph Alarm List Mark List Range From the start time of the first file to the end time of the last file in the selected data file list Group Select the number of the group to print from the Group 01 to 50 options Printout Setup Same as Printout Setup on page 3 63 Manual Report Output You can use th
35. 01EN Organization unit Same as above Common name Same as above E Mail address Same as above Chapter 7 OPC UA Server Function UA option 7 12 7 2 5 Status Page OPC UA server projects do not have a recording function so unlike normal projects items related to recording are not displayed on the Status Page Project Status Monitoring Loss Data Device Running State 002 GP10 001 GM_M22_3 HRT o GP10 R202 01 GM10 R2 02 96 10 0 136 37 10 0 137 42 Normal Normal e Project Status Not monitoring or monitoring e Loss Data Recording data dropout status e Device Running State vn odoF f x 0 a The status of communication with the devices in the Device List is displayed Nothing is displayed when data collection is stopped Model icon 001 GM_M22_3 GM10 R2 02 96 10 0 136 37 Normal Device name Model name Communication address Comm Status IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 8 1 Messages That GA10 May Display Messages may appear on the screen during operation This section describes the messages and how to respond to them Messages Code Message Description and Solution M1001 OK to switch to detail setting mode Unavailable to back to simple setting mode M1002 Do you want to start the monitoring all at once M1003 Do you want to stop the collecting allatonce M1004 Do you wan
36. 1 32 107 10 1 32 116 10 1 32 133 aa f we wy 10 1 32 114 10 1 32 121 10 1 32 131 10 1 32 132 To add a device using the Register Device button follow the procedure below 1 Click Register Device at the top of the Devices List E 7 TT Qegister Device Update Setting mviooo 003 uR20000 004 a3 Device Device 10 1 32 116 10 1 32 128 A Register device dialog box appears 2 Enter the information about the device to be registered For details on the input items see the next page Because the available interface varies depending on the device that you are connecting the communication parameters in the dialog box will change according to the device Registe device Deivce Name Device 01 Deivce Type DX1000 o Comm Kind Ethernet o Host Name lP Address 10 1 32 107 User Name admin User ID User RRR Password Cancel 3 Click OK The dialog box closes and the device is registered to the Registered Devices List IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording Adding Devices To add devices to the Devices List repeat the Registering Files to the Devices List procedure Register Device Dialog Box Details The Register Device dialog box is used to register the devices that you want to connect to The following figure Note P OPORNIE AOAOINA shows the initial screen after yo
37. 4 Menu and Icons This section describes the GA10 menus and icons and page references on how to use them Menu before logging in File View Help A l Tool Bar see the table below Menu Description See pages File F amp Login Login server 2 2 Exit Exit application View Style gt Switch the display style 2 3 4 2 Tool Bar Show or hide the tool bar Help H User s amp Manual F1 Display user operation manual Input Server License Display server license dialogue 2 8 About Display program information version number and copyright 2 8 Server information Display server version information dialogue 2 10 To Update Website Display website of Data Logging Software Menu after logging in Acknowledge of Append mark to all groups device communication interference Append mark to the current group Stop the waring beep Mark edit box Alarm ACK File Edit View Project Operation User Help Pt oe wh hh OO XB PF start v F Pos Bench mac a a SS ee eee Tool Bar Mark Bar Warning Action Bar see the table below see page 4 6 see page 4 10 Menu Description See pages File Logout Logout from server 2 3 New Project Create a Project 2 5 3 2 3 6 Import Project Import Project information to create Project from file 3 6 Export Project Export Project information to file 3 6 Import tags
38. 7 1 Adding Channels GA10UP 01 02 03 04 To add channels tags in the Input Server License dialog box register the upgrade license number The procedure is similar to adding an option The following table shows the maximum number of tags in a project after channels are added Maximum Number of Tags Model Name in a Project Before After GA10UP 01 1 level upgrade 100 200 200 500 500 1000 1000 2000 02 2 level upgrade 100 500 200 1000 500 2000 03 3level upgrade 100 1000 200 2000 04 4 level upgrade 100 2000 Adding a Client GA10CL To add a client use the installer InstallClient_x86 exe which installs only clients InstallClient_x64 exe for the 64 bit edition You can download the installer from the following URL www smartdacplus com software en You will need to enter the client GA10CL license number when you install the client Model Name GA10CL Client license for GA10 Number of license 01 1 license 05 5 licenses 10 10 licenses 50 50 licenses Install additional GA10CLs in different PCs from the one in which the GA10 standard software server and client is installed The installation procedure is the same as the GA10 standard software When you start the client after installation enter the following information uoljeieddigd Ga Chapter 2 Preparation e Host name IP Address The host name or IP address of the PC in which t
39. Any user registered in the server can become a project owner Change Project s Owner Owner New Owner admin Cancel Select a new owner 5 After selecting the new owner click OK The owner will be changed 6 4 4 Opening a Project at a Specific Privilege Level A user assigned to a project can open the project at a privilege level that is lower than the assigned privilege level 1 Display the Project List Page 2 Select a project 3 On the Project menu click Open with Specified Permission An Open with Specified Permission dialog box ap pears IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 6 Managing Users 4 Select the privilege level that you want to use to open the project You can select any level up to your assigned level The following figure is an example of a user who is assigned the Manager level The user cannot select the Owner level because it is higher than the Manager level Open with Specified Permission Please Choose Access Permission O Monitor Owner Manager Operator 5 Click OK The dialog box closes the Project Page appears UZOR OO O OOT Only the operations allowed at the specified privilege level can be used in the project However if the project is locked users other than the user who applied the lock can only access the project at the Monitor level CA 6 4 5 Unlocking a Project by Force The administrator can only unlock locked p
40. C Math Ch C Comment 4 Deivce Type C Sampling Int CI Comment 5 C Serial No C Comment 1 C Comment 6 C Time Correct Comment 2 C Comment7 Meas Ch Comment 3 C Comment 8 CI Comment Selecta SelectNone OK Cancel 8 Printout Setup Set the graph details The items vary depending on the print type set in 5 Item Show or hide Range Print Graph Format 1 page Displayed for Standard Print and Trend Graph 1 page Multiple Pages Line Thick 1 0pt Displayed for Trend Graph and Circular 0 25pt 0 5pt 1 0pt 1 5pt 3 0pt Print Graph Grid 1h div Displayed for Trend Graph and Multiple Page 1min 2min 5min 10min 20min 30min th 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12h 1day 7days 1month Sub Grid None Displayed for Trend Graph and Multiple Page Varies depending on the Print Graph Grid setting See the separate eSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSMsse table Split Circular 1h rev Displayed for Circular 1h 2h 6h 8h 12h 16h Interval 1day 2days 1week 2weeks 4weeks Sub Split None Displayed for Circular Varies depending on Split Circular Interval See the separate table Tag Display Tag No Displayed for Trend Graph Circular Sheet Tag No Tag Comment and Alarm List Tag Index Y Axis Column Num 1 Displayed for Trend Graph and Circular Enter a number between 1 to 50 Legend No Displayed for Trend Graph and Circular Yes or No Color Mode Color Displayed always Black White or color Mark Co
41. Custom Header Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters in first and second fields Colon and space excluded Characters outside the range are replaced with hyphens If you enter Mailer in the first field and GA10 in the second field the email s custom header will be X Mailer GA10 First field Second field Custom Header X4 Mailer 3 Content Body of the email message Enter up to 1000 characters per line and up to 500 lines 6 Message Language The body of email messages consists of the message specified by the user and the message automatically added according to the send conditions The following figure shows the message that is automatically added It displays the event information send conditions divided into the time of occurrence type and details Time 2013 03 11 10 30 26 e Time of occurrence Type Communication Status e _ Type Detail Information The connection of 01 Device001 is Disconnected Details You can change the language of these messages You can select from English Japanese Chinese German French Korean and Russian The default value is the OS language For details on the body of messages see the table on the next page 3 34 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recordin Details on the Body of Messages Send Condition Event Information Message Strings Alarm Status Alarm Status If a message occurs at alarm le
42. Device dialog box if you do not select this option this channel will not be available in the registered device 3 44 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording Description of Data Type ea a a a EIN S22 S INT16 Use when a signed 16 bit integer is assigned to the device register UINT16 Use when an unsigned 16 bit integer is assigned to the device register INT32 B Use when a signed 32 bit integer is assigned to the device register and the smallest register number is assigned to the highest bit Use when a signed 32 bit integer is assigned to the device register and the smallest register number is assigned to the lowest bit Use when an unsigned 32 bit integer is assigned to the device register and the smallest register number is assigned to the highest bit Use when an unsigned 32 bit integer is assigned to the device register and the smallest register number is assigned to the lowest bit Use when a 32 bit floating point number is assigned to the device register and the smallest register number is assigned to the highest bit Use when a 32 bit floating point number is assigned to the device register and the smallest register number is assigned to the lowest bit Data Type Defined in a MODBUS Device Definition File GA10 R2 02 xx and later retains the data types of registers defined in the Modbus device definition file and uses them for displaying and recording The data types of each register cor
43. E3024 An error occurred while writing the file Check that the export destination folder is not set to read only and that there is enough free disk space E3025 User manual does not excit in the specified location Place the PDF manuals in the client installation folder E3018 The equipment in use can not to be removed E3021 Fail to create record folder E3026 Failed to start Adobe Reader Check whether Adobe Reader is installed and the version Simultaneous running projects has reached the The number of running projects in the server has reached the E3027 Z Daa maximum number failed to start monitoring maximum number Stop data collection in other projects EN EEN EE EATA TE E EE Data collection cannot be started because the maximum device E3028 connections will be exceeded Stop data collection in other projects or connected devices is reached collecting cannot start K E E E N Because the maximum device number that can be Delete any of the registered projects first and then register the new E3029 registered is reached the Project can not be created project Because the maximum number of open projects is The number of projects that the client has opened has reached the E3030 reached the project cannot be opened maximum number Close any of the opened projects E3031 Failed to delete data file Another client may be using the data file that you want to delete IM 04L65B01 01EN 8 3 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Co
44. Ethernet network GX10 GX20 GP10 GP20 up to R1 03 02 DA100 DR130 DR230 DR240 DAQLOGGER DAQ32Plus MXLOGGER Devices defined using Modbus device definition files 1 Devices that cannot be detected through the serial interface MX100 MW100 DAQLOGGER DAQ32Plus MXLOGGER Devices whose baud rate is not 9600 bps parity is not even or stop bit is not 1 Devices whose interface is RS 422 or RS 485 1 Modbus device definition file page 3 42 iii hd ddddddddddddddaddadddddddddddddaaaaadadadadadddddddddadddaddadade 3 10 Registering Files to the Devices List For the new project register the devices from which you want to collect and record data to the Devices List You can register devices in the following ways e Register a new device e Register from the Online Devices List e Register from the Registered Devices List In addition you can use the following operations to register devices e Drag amp drop e Register button e Type in the Register Device dialog box Select the device 4 Comm Kind W Ethernet i Serial Dx2000 mviooo f uR20000 Device Device igs i 005 pos poz 008 10 1 32 85 10 1 32 128 10 1 32 116 Click here register button Ethernet Serial DX2000 DX2000 Li et Li at 10 1 32 120 10 1 32 130 10 1 32 115 D Doo f ma f uR10000 Re SSE 10 1 32 128 10
45. Level2 Level3 E Level4 o Level2 Level3 B Tag 0010 Level1 Tag 0011 Level1 Tag 0012 Level1 Tag 0013 Level1 Tag 0014 Level1 Tag 0015 Levelt Tag 0016 Level1 C1 anan a sa Level4 E Level2 Level3 E Level4 yy fi ke B A Level3 Level3 E Level2 Level2 Level4 Level4 E Level2 Level2 9 Level3 Level4 Level3 E Level4 3 FA ee ee FTA A a N E 1 le e e E Level2 Level3 aal Ela 1a K___ Cancel Level4 B j In each 1 second interval of each group the data timestamp of the earliest occurring alarm is used as Note that the method of specifying math tags is the same the alarm timestamp and a single email message is as that for normal measurement tags sent for this alarm TTA The alarm information and instantaneous value in the file attachment will only be for this earliest occurring alarm Email is not sent for all other alarms that occur e The condition for sending email is based on the alarm information of data collected at the data collection interval The condition for starting and stopping recording is based on the alarm information of data recorded at the record interval Behavior When Sending Email at Specified Intervals If email send condition is set to Specified
46. List Page File Edit View Project Operation Use ESCM mw amp Ale z aa L Goo j Ceea IM 04L65B01 01EN 2 On the File menu click New Project The Create New Project dialog box appears Type the project name and comment Set Settings Mode to Simple Settings Differences between Simple Settings and Detail Settings gt page 3 1 Create New project moeststane 7 Comment Settings Mode C Simple Settings XO Detail Settings z Cancel 4 Click OK A new project is created in the Project List Page CHi J e a_j E Good z le WY CCCCCCCCCCCOOOQOOOCQOQOOQOOAOOOOOoOAO0M e You can enter up to 20 characters for Project s Name and 60 characters for Comment Following characters are unavailable for Project s name lt gt e In Simple Settings you only have to specify the data collection source device record interval and data file save destination to start collecting data e If you select Simple Settings you can change to Detail Settings while you are configuring a new project but you cannot change from Detail Settings to Simple Settings CULLA A project that you create is shown in the Project List Page along with the information about the project Access privilege and the user name et name e Access ENS Project_1 privilege Owner admin admin Locking User who are locking accessing The
47. Loading and Saving Report Template Files Template Example Channel number Ch R001 Ch R002 Name Tank 1 temperature Tank 1 pressure Unit Unit RO01 Unit RO002 ReportDataTime Hour ReportDatalnst Hour R001 ReportDatalnst Hour ROO2 Repeat Repeat Repeat Repeat Repeat Repeat Report Output Example Channel number TIC 001 PIC 002 Name Tank 1 temperature Tank 1 pressure Unit kPa 2012 12 01 00 00 00 i 45 6 2012 12 01 01 00 00 56 7 2012 12 01 02 00 00 50 8 App Keyword Format Keywords are written by themselves or with parameters Keyword parameter Example ReportDataSum Hour R001 00 23 xipueddy Basic Rules e The dollar sign on the left indicates the start of a keyword and the dollar sign on the right indicates the end of a keyword e You can only write keywords using letters of the alphabet dollar signs parentheses commas and spaces You can put a space after an opening parenthesis before and after a comma and before a closing parenthesis Keywords are not case sensitive You cannot use a dollar sign inside of a keyword e The maximum length of a keyword including spaces is 100 characters Parameter Rules e Parameters are enclosed in parentheses e Multiple parameters up to 4 are separated by commas e Examples of how parameters can be omitted are shown below ReportDataSum Hour R001 23 Th
48. MM DD hh mm ss Type Periodically Notification Detail Information The condition of sending mail in ProjectName is at hh mm ss of each month Specified Duration Specified Duration Time YYYY MM DD hh mm ss Type Regularly Notification Detail Information The condition of sending mail in ProjectName is every hh mm ss File is created File is created Time YYYY MM DD hh mm ss Type Data file Detail Information A data file FileName in ProjectName is created 3 35 Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 36 7 Attached Files The alarm information and instantaneous value of tags can be attached as a file to outgoing messages The types and selectable range of Attached Files vary depending on the sending condition Send Condition File Attachment File Type Tag Specification Alarm Status Yes Alarm information A tag range can be specified or tags can be instantaneous value specified in detail individually Comm Status No Not available Not available Specified period Yes Alarm information A tag range can be specified or tags can be instantaneous value specified in detail individually Specified duration Yes Alarm information A tag range can be specified or tags can be instantaneous value specified in detail individually File is created Yes Data file Not available When Range Is Used for Attached Files Attached Files E Alarm Information _ Instantaneous Value Range Tag 0
49. Page Update Tag Information Refresh The tag information on the Tag Setting Page is updated in the following situations e When a channel device is changed on the Tag Setting Page If you change the channel or device on the Tag Setting Page Tag No Tag Comment Type and Dec Point are retrieved from the specified channel Channel change Tag NO Device vi Monitor Record Device Tag Comment Type Dec Point 2 m0001 Ml 001 Device 0001 LONG 4 Se Tas igioo02 001 Dev 0002 LONG 4 m0003 001 Devi 0003 BOOL o amp Display s mo004 001 Device 0004 LONG 4 m0005 001 Device 0005 LONG 4 f ooos 001 Devi 0006 LONG 4 io SH Record w m0007 001Devi 0007 LONG 4 moo08 Ml 001 Devi 0008 LONG 4 Eg Email s mo009 001 Device 0009 LONG 4 m0010 O 01 Device 0010 LONG 4 1 m0011 001 Devi 0011 BOOL 0 Ea Accessaotners M moo 001Devi 0012 BOOL O0 m0013 001 Device 0013 BOOL WO m0014 MM 001 Device 0014 BOOL 0 io Updated with the information of the new channel e When monitoring is started At the start of monitoring when the device is connected the most recent channel information is retrieved from the device and the alarm value range and
50. Period note the following points e Do not change the time during data collection and recording Doing so will affect the timestamps of data attached to e mails e The timing for sending email is different when Data time is set to PC time and when Data time is set to Device time PC time The time on the PC in which the server is installed is used The data in the file attachment is all the tag data within the specified range Device time If Device time is specified tags are grouped by device or interval Because the timestamps attached to the data is used in each group multiple emails may be sent at the device level or interval level If there are no tags that belong to a group in the specified range file attachment is not created Note wanna e The maximum number of emails that the server can hold is 40 per project This includes emails that fail transmission and retransmissions e Emails held in the server are deleted when the specified retransmission count is reached or when the server stops Wied ssdddcccccdddddddddaddddddddddddddddadddddddadadaddd ddde IM 04L65B01 01EN 3 37 Buipiosay pue uona gaq Bunes pue Bulinbyu05 a Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 3 8 Setting Project Access Privileges In GA10 you can set access privileges at the project level separately from the server access privileges administrator and user privileges These privileges define the operation scope
51. Source Software OpenSSL The OPC UA server function of the following product uses OpenSSL source code for communication This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com In accordance with the OpenSSL license agreement the copyright notice redistribution conditions and license are listed below SMARTDAC Data Logging Software GA10 LICENSE ISSUES The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license i e both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit See below for the actual license texts Actually both licenses are BSD style Open Source licenses In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl core openssl org OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2011 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning feature
52. Value From 11 To H gt lt Value From 12 To L gt lt Value From 25 To ETC gt lt Value From 26 To ETC gt lt Value From 27 To ETC gt lt Table gt Parameter values specified as Trans SPAlarmTypeTable are converted into alarm types lt Table Name SPAlarmType Table ToDataType String gt lt Value From 28 To H gt If the value is 28 the alarm type is displayed as H lt Value From 29 To L gt lt Value From 68 To H gt lt Value From 69 To L gt lt Table gt Parameter values specified as Trans OutAlarmTypeTable are converted into alarm types lt Table Name OutAlarmType Table ToDataType String gt lt Value From 30 To H gt If the value is 30 the unit is displayed as H lt Value From 31 To L gt lt Value From 70 To H gt lt Value From 71 To L gt lt Table gt lt Trans Tables gt lt ModbusDevice gt EOF IM 04L65B01 01EN 3 49 Builpiooay pue UO DAIJOD ejyeg Hulyieyg pue Hulsnbiyuoy Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 5 Using the Math Function MT option 3 5 1 Setting Math Tags The GA10 s Math function MT option can be used to set expressions with constants operators and functions to display and record save the calculated results To use the Math function you need to set the math tags on the Math Tag Setting Page You can set up to 200 math tags M8 WE Before using the Math functio
53. Without limit When you click the icon to select it waveform display limit is enabled When you apply the waveform display limit the Y axis display range is limited to the minimum and maximum values that you specified using Scale in Display Group Measured values that are less than the minimum scale value are set to the minimum value and values that are greater than the maximum scale value are set to the maximum value When you click the icon to unselect it waveform display limit is disabled In this condition measured values outside the scale are displayed as they are 4 2 3 Controlling the Y axis e Y axis Display Zone You can select the Y axis display zone Y axis display zone specifies the scale position and length It is the waveform position and range Full zone Slide zone Auto zone Free zone hig A oiana Baa e Full Zone Displays all waveforms in the maximum range e Slide Zone Displays each waveform cascaded from the top to the bottom of the waveform display area e Auto Zone Divides the waveform display area into equally spaced zones in accordance with the number of waveforms and displays the waveforms e Free Zone Displays waveforms in user specified zones e Operations in Free Zone In Free Zone mode you can change the Y axis display zone as you like Zoom in out on the Y axis When you move the pointer near the lower or upper edge of the Y axis scale the pointer changes to J In this condition d
54. a PrO 210 oe a E E E E EE EEA E 2 5 Other Optional Operati rniS nce enc ee ce cease Sc ena nace rr ba ri rars Eer sees AET rar ninii 2 6 2 17 1 Starting Restarting and Stopping the Servel ccccccccscssseceeeceeessseeeesseessseeeessenees 2 6 2 1 2 Changing the Server Port Number ssccencinocpaiascetinnncniccebctavenicneetaanidencmatenieventxecnctdtenekietionse 2 7 2 3 Entering a License Number GA10 GA10CL GA10UP nnnssnsennneesseenrnenesrnreresseerrnnen 2 8 2 7 4 Checking the Number of Channels Tags and Options That Can Be Used 2 10 2 1 Changing mhe Language sseiccts cate nceesawecabedaadicaaceaastaaseasiaaieansadendiaatedeeateed aeeanecebedeanandans 2 10 2 7 6 B EEL E E a EEEE PET EEE sere er erent rere rer terete er terete EEIEIE re rrr 2 11 Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 1 3 2 3 3 What Are Simple Settings and Detail Settings nnnn0nnnnnennnnennnnnnnrrnnsnrrnesnrnrnssrrrrssrrene 3 1 Easy Configuration Simple Settings cccccccssscceccseceeceesseeeceescecesesesecseeesesseeseeesseees 3 2 3 2 1 Creating a Project in Simple Settings Mode ccccccccccceeseeeeeseauesseeeeseauesseeeeesseanes 3 2 3 22 Registering Devices to Connect vicscncssncezcenatsnsatancsnedenacneddosassasnwos pauzacenandncunensexneseennnadaness 3 2 3 2 3 Setting the Monitor and Record Interval and Save Destination cccccccseeeeeeeeeeees 3 4 3 2 4 St
55. at the start of recording e Ifa backfill operation cannot start due to a device access failure or other reason GA10 will access the device every hour e Ifthe server stops during a backfill operation the operation will stop Even if the server is restarted the previous backfill operation will not be performed e If any of the following settings on the device is changed after starting data collection backfill will not be performed Acquisition interval time channel on off decimal place unit span scale alarm on off alarm type and alarm value e Ifthe advanced security function AS option is enabled on the GX GP backfill operation is not performed for user levels other than monitor Buljooyusajqnoiy The server stopped or the server PC shut down How does the server operate after it restarts A5 Server recovery The server retains the most recent status information just in case the host PC shuts down When the PC restarts the server recovers the operation based on the status information Resuming data collection and recording The server resumes data collection and recording after it restarts unless the user had manually stopped the server or shut down the host PC Depending on the power off condition monitoring and recording after restarting will behave as shown in the following table Monitoring Recording File Division Backfill Condition after Restart Display Division Operation Sudden power off Unpredictab
56. button A IMPORTANT If Tag No and Tag Comment are already registered on the GA10 version R2 01 xx or earlier do not execute Update Setting Doing so may erase the registered information IM 04L65B01 01EN Registering Devices to the Registered Devices List The Registered Devices List shows a list of devices registered to the server In the initial page nothing will appear When you add a new device to the Devices List it is also automatically added to the Registered Devices List You can also drag a device from the Online Devices List to register it Display filter ee Comm Kind Ethernet Serial DX2000 f MV1000 i Device ta Update 10 1 32 85 10 1 32 128 Click Update to retrieve the most recent list of devices from the server You can set the Comm Kind filter to display only the devices using the specified interface If you select Serial the devices connected to the serial port of the server PC will be displayed Starting the Web Application GX GP and GM Click Setting in the device information display area to start the Web application for configuring devices 1 In the Project List Page double click the appropriate project 2 Change the project setting window to the Device Setting Page 3 Select the icon of the device that you want to change the settings of The information of the selected device appears in the bottom device information area 4
57. changed e Mail Tag indexes are changed If a tag range is specified for Trigger the numbers are sorted while maintaining the range position At this point the Trigger setting changes from Easy to Detail Exporting and Importing Tags Tag information can be converted exported to a TSV file You can edit the TSV file using an appropriate software application and load import it back into GA10 0 WYOECCCCCCCCCCOOOOOOOCOOOAQO00OAO0O0c0Oo Only tag numbers and tag comments are exported and imported LLL sggpdsssiddddddcccdcddddddadddddddadddddddddaddddd de e Export Procedure Display the Tag Setting Page of the project whose tag information you want to save 2 On the File menu click Export tags Select the save destination assign a name and save it The tag information file tsv extension is saved to the specified location Tag numbers and tag comments are exported in pairs in separate lines as shown below TagO001 TagCommentO001 TagQ002 TagCommentO0002 Tag0003 TagComment0003 Tag0004 TagComment0004 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recordin e Import Procedure 1 Display the Tag Setting Page of the project whose tag information you want to update 2 On the File menu click Import tags An Open dialog box appears 3 Select the file that you want to import and click Open The content of the imported tag information TSV file is applied to the Tag Setting
58. color i H Tag 0001 H 1 0075 Tag 0001 1 7143 V Blinks in alarm off color Turns on in alarm on color e Ifan alarm occurs and is released before the alarm ACK operation the color changes to that when alarm is not occurring but blinking continues until the alarm ACK operation is executed e Ifan alarm occurs again after an alarm ACK operation is executed blinking will start again e Alarm ACK operations do not affect data collection devices IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 4 Monitoring Data Collection 4 6 4 Performing an Acknowledge of Device Communication Interference If communication with connected devices is disconnected during data collection and recording the icon on the toolbar blinks in the alarm color to indicate the error Acknowledge of Device Communication Interference is an operation for checking the communication error and the affected projects e Stopping the Warning Beep To stop the warning beep click the ms icon or click Stop the Warning Beep from the Operation menu You cannot stop the sound just by performing an ACK operation Note that even when the beep is stopped if a communication disconnection occurs again it will beep again Related topic section 4 6 2 e Checking the Device Communication Disconnection On the Operation menu click Acknowledge of Device Communication Interference Or click the icon The icon blinking stops and the Project List Page appears On the Projec
59. devices can be connected without creating definition files Basic Operation 1 Create a Modbus device definition file in XML format by using the Modbus Device Definition File Creating Tool or by referring to the provided example We suggest that you use the Windows standard Notepad or a text editor to edit the file You can download the Modbus Device Definition File Creating Tool from the following URL www smartdacplus com software en 2 Save the file Save the file using UTF 8 encoding 3 Place the Modbus device definition file in the C Program Files Yokogawa Electric Corporation SMARTDAC Data Logging Software Modbus folder of the PC in which the server is installed 4 Restart the server Restart procedure section 2 7 1 The name of the registered Modbus device appears next to Device Type in the Register device dialog box A dialog box for registering new devices 5 Select the registered Modbus device from the Device Type The input items for communication appear Register device x Deivce Name Device Deivce Type UT55A X 6 Input the information then click OK Comm Kind Note waa When using a Modbus definition file to perform communication through the Ethernet interface set the scan interval to a value less than the communication timeout value of the device UUA IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 4 2 What Is a Modbus De
60. dialog box is open the alarm information of the opened project will be displayed in the dialog box 4 6 2 Notification of Alarms and Communication Errors with Sound On the Operation menu click Warning Beep to add a check mark When an alarm or communication error with connected devices occurs the PC will beep To stop the sound on the Operation menu click Stop the Warning Beep Or click the af icon To disable the alarm sound on the Operation menu click Warning Beep to remove the check mark Me WY e To generate sounds the PC must be equipped with a sound generating function and sound must be turned on e You cannot change the sound viii hdd gssssdidccccccddddddddddcccddddaddaddddddddddddadaddada 4 10 4 6 3 Perform Alarm ACK Operations If an alarm occurs in a monitored tag after data monitoring is started the corresponding area blinks in the alarm color to indicate the alarm occurrence An alarm ACK operation refers to the act of stopping this blinking On the Project menu click Alarm ACK Or click the ee ICON The blinking alarm indication stops e Alarm ACK Operation and Alarm Indication Transition The following figure shows how the alarm indication transitions as an alarm occurs is released and is acknowledged with alarm ACK The figure shows an example of a Digital Monitor Set tag gt Tag 0001 1 1111 Alarm occurrence Tag 0001 1 5151 Alarm ACK Blinks in alarm on
61. ene ee ener Tn ae nn er een ae ney 4 13 Connectable De VICES cccceeccccceeeceecceeeceesseeeeeeseaeeessaeees 3 11 Copying and PASUNG secczacutistenenescnsieennnene toventaddedenandeneuatontaanencs 3 8 GPS AMON OOl iiinn aean 3 42 C a A E noarecces 7 3 TS ON A svat ec Ge dee oss E E A E A eau eenee 4 5 Guston PAT eee ek nema ener see eer ne ae ee 3 57 De Data Daken E E ones uate eee 8 6 Data files Page ccccceeeeeeeee ees 3 4 4 1 5 1 8 2 8 4 8 7 Data MEIC RUNS ascia aa e an a ESE GE NSi 7 2 DDE ie eceg setae sa sate es canes scaeeesetiecasaseece a sence eens 1 6 3 40 Decimal point TOMM AL a cis226c0iecssscoeccesccanesssntesnsseennceedenesctedanstens 3 64 SS SS acerca acta aren eE en EDESSE EPEAN EENE E EOE 6 3 Detail Settings x osshccarccimeennenaiot bis ateasacdecnehdbecaieanesdanouierabicenies 3 1 Device Setting Page vicsissiceotenssheeaindsbacdannenneniagubtcsennneneumenserneds 3 9 DEVICES LIS eee ee ere n eee eee 3 9 DEVICE UME sense ccrcetacteascennnisddacebacgenseqnascadiiesstaszccpeqnensadiectactcaine 8 9 Digital DIS Olay enceten anier E iNi TS 4 7 Display Group Setting Page ccccccccsssssseeeeeseeneeeeeesseees 3 20 PEO ONO ae S 2 6 E Email Setting Page scianssanscossnaesastasndaauinsecnnesebesinsatnins sncencetees 3 31 CO e a EEEE E E E E EE 3 6 EDON aA ouaatnaenietaieenteieaeiaiean 3 6 3 18 PE Filename Naming Rule ics cicactscicriccrcresadsintadtentannseatemactadinecind 3 68 TUM a E E A IT E A
62. free space in the save destination folder and write privileges E3060 Failed to download the template file The template file cannot be downloaded to the specified folder Check the free space in the specified folder and write privileges E3061 Failed to delete the template file The template file cannot be deleted Check write privileges of the save destination folder Check that the file is not opened with another application E3062 Failed to delete the schedule A schedule that is in the middle of monitoring or recording cannot be deleted E3063 Excel is not installed Install Excel E3064 Can not open the report file Check that the report file is in the report folder E3065 Failed to generate a report file Check the disk space of the server s report file save destination and folder s write privileges Check the presence of the data file E3066 Failed to print Check the presence of the data file E3067 Failed to issue a certificate signing request Check the presence of the data file Check that the file name destination folder and other settings are correct E3068 The option is already enabled The option corresponding to the license number you entered is already enabled E3069 Failed to start the OPC UA server The port number is There may be a port number collision Check that the OPC UA server already in use port number is not being used by another process E3070 The server certificate is invalid The private key and certifica
63. ieee nutoentcemmetees 3 38 6 4 P pAaASSWOTFd crunincinencdbietopessonbiinhanihdstdudmnnmuminionaseties 2 3 2 4 3 2 6 2 FN sae E R 8 9 Port PIO GE csascapcexauterssueenaepanceaasiwseesssnnreancenasecsieaiennnemesacena as 2 7 Print GACY eiiam ni nnan aiie ani 3 63 privala KOY raie E a Er 7 3 IS 1 PEPE EE E AE E E E T 1 2 2 5 R PP Or FIE osea EEE E 3 28 Registering USCIS on iccicstnrtattsmncconniuiws bustettony uintd mineee ehtominadudtbnsinnes 6 3 IO OUI AET AT T T T T 3 57 Report Print function enneenneeenneeenn 1 5 2 9 3 57 4 12 5 3 report SCS CUMS cess sacecacunaceaneatandicaanecndsentiaadendseansaatenalewenidnaiedaad 4 12 Report Template Builder cccccscesseeeees 3 61 3 65 3 68 Report Templates cccccccssecccseeeceeseeceesescuseeseeseesesess App 1 FFs a ARUN E E A E E E E E E O 2 6 S save interval ooo eee ec ces eeceececeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneaeeaeeens 3 68 5 6 SGU arco correcta TTA AT EAEE ATE A TT 3 62 Screen Background Color sssssssnnseerresrrssesrrreersrrsnrresernrree 4 2 self signed Certificate cccccccccesceeeceeeeeeeeeeees 7 3 7 8 7 10 TS Iressa a EN E NE E T A E E A towne to A A E AN 1 1 Server LICENSE ceccecceececeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaneneeneees 2 8 2 9 EEEE T A A mt 7 3 Server SlAMING SIOPPING ceciicescccccscssivensnescnsennenncaccsesewnnnscnnwesene 2 6 Simple SEUNG Sesinia inii aiai airi esk 2 5 SMTP SEVE eenei oniri ete eeiene
64. if false Logical OR continue calculation even if true AA Exclusive OR Conditional operator l Comma operator The operator precedence is shown below The operator on the left of the arrow has higher precedence than that on the right unary operator arithmetic operator lt gt lt gt relational k J operator amp amp logical operator conditional operator comma operator 3 53 Bulpiooay pue UO DAIJOD ezeq Buiezs pue Hulsnbiyuoy Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 54 Available Functions The following functions can be used in expressions Math constants cannot be used in event functions Event Functions Functions that perform specific actions Math constants cannot be used in event functions Function Action Example ResetMath Resets math TAG 00010 gt 1 0 ResetMath 0 Mark mark quotations Creates a mark Characters of your choice inside the double Mark alarmMark Reference Functions Functions for retrieving measured values and alarm values Function Action Example Tag lt Taglndex gt Returns the current value of the specified tag Either Tag 0001 tag index or tag number can be specified PreTag lt TagIndex gt Returns the previous value of the specified tag PreTag 0001 Either tag index or
65. information that is used for DDE queries is the PC time in which the server is installed The time when the collected data is set to the DDE server is the time that is output Therefore if Data time is set to Device time the time and value of the data on the Monitor Page or data recorded to the data file will not be synchronized to the time and value output by the DDE server e The data number is output only when Data time is set to PC time It is not output when Data time set to Device time In the Project List Page double click e If communication between the data collection device and the server is disconnected and Data time is set to PC time OFF is output for the data value If set to Device time data updating stops regardless of whether FIFO is being used This is the same behavior as when the data collection from the device is delayed e For information on how to use a DDE client see the manual for the DDE client Vex psd sssrsrddcccccccccccccdccccdddaddddddddddddddiddddiie 3 41 Buipiosay pue uona gaq Buljels pue BulinbByu045 D Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 3 11 Starting Data Collection and Recording You can start data collection and recording using a configured project To close the project without collecting data click the x icon on the right edge of the page Controlling an Opened Project Individually Click the icons that are displayed on the tab on the right side of the
66. is refreshed 5 2 Displaying Recording Data Recording data can be displayed in a viewer Universal Viewer 1 Select the file you want to view You can select multiple link files 2 Click Open The viewer Universal Viewer starts and the data in the file is displayed You can also double click the file to display the data ZOOO OOTA e For instructions on how to use Universal Viewer see the Universal Viewer User s Manual IM 04L61B01 O1EN e GA10 recording data dld extension can be displayed on Universal Viewer version R1 03 and later e The language set in GA10 do not apply to the language of the viewer To change the language for displaying files on the viewer set it in the viewer CULA IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 5 Managing Recording Data 5 3 Printing Recorded Data Manually RP option On GA10 with the Report Print function RP option the Custom Print and Custom Report buttons are displayed at the top of the Data File List screen 5 1 You can use these buttons to print manually Custom Print You can use the Custom Print button at the top of the Data File List screen to manually perform printing that is equivalent to the Custom Print of scheduled auto printing Manual custom print Manual report output Data File List C Show Files in Link View Custom Print Custom Report Folder C Wsers Public DocumentsiSMARTDAC Data Logging Software Data project_a prs E 3 File Name D
67. les a re deleted Data 20131118143517 did 1931 1 Second 2013 11 18 14 35 17 000 2013 11 18 15 07 27 000 122768 Data 20131118131653 did 674 1 Second 2013 11 18 13 16 53 000 2013 11 18 13 28 06 000 52104 Data 20131118130937 did 333 1 Second 2013 11 18 13 09 37 000 2013 11 18 13 15 09 000 33008 Data 20131118091937 did 534 1 Second 2013 11 18 09 19 37 000 2013 11 18 09 28 30 000 44264 Data 20131118084907 did 1349 1 Second 2013 11 18 08 49 07 000 2013 11 18 09 11 35 000 89904 Data 20131115085336 did 10317 1 Second 2013 11 15 08 53 36 000 2013 11 15 11 45 32 000 592112 Data 20131113145948 did 1193 1 Second 2013 11 13 14 59 48 000 2013 11 13 15 19 40 000 81168 e S h 1 d H id 1 C Data 20131112130702 did 7 1 Second 2013 11 12 13 07 02 000 2013 11 12 13 07 08 000 14752 OWI n g a n l l n g O u m n S lt on If you move the pointer over a column title a hide icon appears Click it to hide the column When you hide a column a show icon will appear in the upper right of the page Click this icon to show the hidden columns Item File Name Data Number Displayed Content Name of the data file Number of data values in the data file The total number of data values if files are linked and displayed Recording interval used to create the data file The time of the first data value in the data file The time of the first data of the entire data if files are linked and displayed The time of the last data value in the data file The time
68. limit alarm output high limit alarm Low limit alarm measurement low limit alarm deviation low limit alarm setting low limit alarm output low limit alarm Difference high limit alarm Difference low limit alarm High limit on rate of change alarm Low limit on rate of change alarm Delay high limit alarm Delay low limit alarm Deviation out limit alarm Od 44 gt gt doo A Deviation in limit alarm Other alarm e Date and Time The date and time of alarm occurrence and release e Alarm Level Displayed Content Description L1 Alarm level 1 L2 Alarm level 2 L3 Alarm level 3 L4 Alarm level 4 e Alarm Type Displayed Content Description high limit alarm L Low limit alarm dH Difference high limit alarm dL Difference low limit alarm RH High limit on rate of change alarm RL Low limit on rate of change alarm tH Delay high limit alarm tL Delay low limit alarm PVH Measurement high limit alarm PVL Measurement low limit alarm DVH Deviation high limit alarm DVL Deviation low limit alarm DVO Deviation out limit alarm DVI Deviation in limit alarm SPH Setting high limit alarm SPL Setting low limit alarm OTH Output high limit alarm OTL Output low limit alarm ETC Other alarm e Status Displayed Content Description ON Indicates that an alarm has occurred
69. of the last data of the entire data if files are linked and displayed Data file size The total data size if files are linked and displayed Title and content of Comment 1 to 8 that were specified when the file was created Record Interval Start Time Hide icon End Time 2013 11 18 16 07 57 000 40960 7128141142 16 N7 97 nnn End Time Show icon File Size End Time Commenti 2013 11 18 16 27 35 000 712144140 4 N7 7 NANN Comment 1 Comment 2 Comment 3 Comment 4 Comment 5 Comment 6 Comment 7 Comment 8 Does not include the values of deleted files and other files that do not exist The results of showing and hiding columns apply to every project in the same client IM 04L65B01 01EN 5 1 Chapter 5 Managing Recording Data Adjusting Column Widths When you move the pointer near a boundary of a column title the pointer changes to lt gt In this condition drag the pointer to move the boundary to the desired position The results of adjusting column widths apply to every project in the same client Sorting the File List Click a column title to sort the file list on the basis of the clicked column Click it again to sort in reverse order A sort mark A V appears in the column title area Refreshing the Display On the View menu click Refresh The most recent file information is retrieved from the server and the page
70. or floating point F Fixed point display E Floating point display 5 Meter Specify the type of meter to display on the Meter Monitor Select bar meter or analog meter E 6 Scale MIN and MAX Type the minimum and maximum values of the scale on the Monitor Page to define the display range IM 04L65B01 01EN e gogog 7 Scale Interval Set whether to specify the Y axis scale interval of the waveform Leave unselected to use the default scale interval To specify the scale interval select the check box and enter a value 8 Zone MAX Specify the maximum Y axis position for displaying the waveform MIN Specify the minimum Y axis position for displaying the waveform This determines the waveform display position 9 Color Specify the waveform display color To change the color click the appropriate cell to display a separate window Select a color to apply it to the sheet 10 Trip Use Click to use the waveform trip line Value Type the value Color Specify the trip line color To change the color click the appropriate cell to display a separate window Select a color to apply it to the sheet 3 21 Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording Collectively Edit Setup Data To collectively edit setup data you must select the target setup data and then click a button on t
71. setting is at 02 30 00 and the time for switching to DST is between 02 00 00 and 03 00 00 the condition will be executed at 03 00 00 If Condition is set to Interval Base time to a time on the hour e g 0 00 00 and Range to a duration equal to Interval the range of the graph will be longer than the specified interval when the time changes from DST to standard time Example If the time change from DST to standard time is 1 00 to 0 00 Interval is 4hours Base time is a time on the hour and the range is from 0 00 00 to 4 00 00 the actual graph will be 5 hours between 0 00 00 and 4 00 00 If the Start Time or the End Time of the specified range in manual Custom Print or manual Report Output is in the DST transition time period the range will assumed to be from before the DST transition or up to the end of the DST transition Example If the transition from DST to standard time is 1 00 0 00 and the specified start and end times are 0 50 and 2 00 the range will be 2 hours 10 minutes LL hhh bbb bbbbsdddddcddddddddddddddddcddcddddddddddcdddddddddddddddddadddaaddaddde 3 75 Builpiooay pue UO DAIJOD ejyeg Hulyieyg pue Hulinbyuoy ss Bia eee Chapter 4 Monitoring Data Collection 4 1 Monitoring on the Monitor Page This section explains the Monitor Page for Detail Settings mode In Simple Settings mode the Monitor Page consists of the Trend Monitor Set and Digital Monitor Set The operation is the same 4 1 1 D
72. software license number If a certificate does not exist when the GA10 OPC UA server is started a self signed certificate is automatically created with the following information Issuer information and subject information will be the same Details of the Items in the Self Signed Certificate Created Automatically Item Name Description Version V3 Serial No Auto generation Signature Algorithm Sha1RSA Signature Hash Algorithm Sha1 Issuer Country JP Issuer State Tokyo Issuer City Musashino Issuer Organization Yokogawa Electric Corp Issuer Organization unit Product Business Center Issuer Common name GA10 UAServer ComputerName Issuer Domain component ComputerName Valid from PC time when the certificate was created Valid to 2037 12 1 21 00 00 Subject Country JP Subject State Tokyo Subject City Musashino Subject Organization Yokogawa Electric Corp Subject Organization unit Product Business Center Subject Common name2 GA10 UAServer ComputerName Subject E Mail address2 Blank 1 Generated automatically from the server software license number 2 The PC name is entered in ComputerName 7 10 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 7 OPC UA Server Function UA option Basic Operation 3 Creating a Certificate Signing Request CSR 1 Click Issue a certificate signi
73. source code or other human readable format or to revise or translate the Software Product into other language and change it to other formats than that in which Yokogawa provided to cause permit or attempt to remove any copy protection used or provided in the Software Product or f to remove any copyright notice trademark notice logo or other proprietary notices or identification shown in the Software Product 2 3 Any and all technology algorithms know how and process contained in the Software Product are the property or trade secret of Yokogawa or licensors to Yokogawa Ownership of and all the rights in the Software Product shall be retained by Yokogawa or the licensors and none of the rights will be transferred to you hereunder 2 4 You agree to maintain the aforementioned property and trade secret of Yokogawa or licensors and key codes in strict confidence not to disclose it to any party other than your employees officers directors or similar staff who have a legitimate need to know to use the Software Product and agreed in writing to abide by the obligations hereunder 2 5 Upon expiration or termination of this Agreement the Software Product and its copies including extracts shall be returned to Yokogawa and any copies retained in your computer or media shall be deleted irretrievably If you dispose of media in which the Software Product or its copy is stored the contents shall be irretrievably deleted 2 6 The Software Product may contain so
74. that apply when you start the service from here Start parameters PORT 65530 Click Start Click OK to close the window 2 7 3 Entering a License Number GA10 GA10CL GA10UP When entering a license number use Windows administrator privileges If you are using Windows 7 follow steps 1 and 2 below to start the software and then enter the license number Checking the Remaining Trial Period In the software click About on the Help menu and check the remaining number of days in the dialog box that appears Entering a License Number during the Trial Period 1 Right click Data Logging Software in the Start menu On the shortcut menu click Run as administrator Data Logging Software starts Log in to the server AO N On the Help menu click Input Server License A dialog box appears Input Server License Please input software s license numbers CO C0 C0 C C amp esistess Item License 5 Type the license number and click Register A message is displayed Q Server is activated Please restart server M1012 6 Click OK The license number appears in the dialog box Input Server License Please input software s license numbers Item License Content License 100 Close 6 Click OK IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 2 Preparation Me WCC After registering the license you must restart the server Restarting the server gt Sec 2 7 1 LLL hsb sbdddcsiddcccdddddccddd
75. the importing GA10 does not have You can continue importing by clicking OK in the message dialog box The following table shows the result of importing Result of importing GA10 Functions not available on the import destination GA10 server Settings Channels Math function Report function es IMT IRP E Math Math Tag Math Tag __ Record When Start Condition or Stop Condition is Alarm Report Print When Task is Report Attached Files Range a outside the server s tag range are set to None a outside the server s tag range are set to None If the start tag or end tag is outside the server s tag range the range is set to the server s maximum Tag Index If the start tag exceeds the server s tag range Start Condition is set to Immediate and Stop Condition is set to Continuous Tags outside the server s tag range are set to None If the start tag exceeds the server s maximum Tag Index mail is set to OFF If the start tag or end tag is outside the server s tag range the range is set to the server s maximum Tag Index In Detail Settings mode tags exceeding the server s tag range are not displayed If the start tag exceeds the server s maximum Tag Index the inclusion of Alarm Information and Instantaneous Value is set to OFF If the start tag or end tag is outside the server s tag range the range is set to the server s maximum Tag I
76. the items in the table IM 04L65B01 01EN 3 69 Builpiooay pue UO DAIJOD eyeg Hulyieyg pue Hulsnbiyuoy Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 6 6 Schedule Conditions and Range Display examples of Condition report output and time to execute printing and Range on the report schedule setting page are provided below The schedule range display allows you to view the specified range on a time table The condition time is displayed with il the start time of the specified range with L and the end time with l The range display for each condition applies both to auto print and manual print You can view the schedule and history of report schedules that have been set on the Status Page When Condition Is Set to Every Hour Below is the display example for Condition and Range when Condition is set to Every Hour e Time span 2 hours e Scale minute 0 15 30 45 0 15 30 45 O Condition amp 01 00 Range Start Time End Time Condition time 0 00 6 00 12 00 18 00 0 00 6 00 12 00 18 00 0 00 Start Time End time Item Default Value Selectable Range Condition 0 00 mm ss Every Hour Every Hour every hour Minute 00 to 59 Range Prev Hour 0 00 to Prev Hour and Start Time 0 minutes or later of the Prev Hour Current Hour 0 00 Current Hour Minute 00 to 59 Second 00 to 59 End Time Up to the specified minute of the condition The maximum time between start and end is 1 hour Start Time
77. the search operation to complete and try searching again E3054 Failed to update the information of some specified tags Check the communication status of the device used by the tag to be or all tags updated 8 4 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Code Message Description and Solution Below are possible reasons Check the condition of the save destination e There is not enough free space on the data save destination drive e If the data save destination is an external storage device the device E3055 Cannot write to specified recording folder is not inserted properly or is removed e The data save destination is set to read only e The data save destination drive is broken e A location folder that is restricted by the operating system of the server is specified Make sure that the version of the added client is the same as the E3056 Connecting this version s server is not available server version Download the latest version of the software from the following URL www smartdacplus com software en E3057 Failed to install the certificate The certificate cannot be stored in the server Check the certificate format file size free space in the save destination folder and write privileges E3058 The license is already in use A client with the same license number is already connected Check the license number E3059 Failed to register the template file The template file cannot be stored in the server Check the
78. the selected range will be changed M 001 Device A001 T1001 LONG amp m0034 001 Device PIOO1 LONG 1 i m0035 001 Device A003 T1002 LONG 0036 001 Device F1002 LONG amp 0037 001 Device SC A005 TI003 LONG 1 moose 001 Device P1003 LONG amp i 0039 001 Device SC A007 TI004 LONG 1 amp m 0040 W 001 Device Caos T1005 LONG 1 m 0041 W 001 Device OC Ad TI011 LONG 1 m 0042 W 001 Device Cadiz TI012 LONG 1 m 0043 001 Device amp A013 T1013 LONG z 1 z G G Sorting tags in order of the device No The specified tags can be sorted in order by device number registered in the Devices List first precedence and by channel number of each device second precedence On the Project menu click Sorting tags in order of the device No Or click the icon on the toolbar ZOOO OOA Sorting is not applied to math tags MT option A When you perform Sorting tags in order of the device No various settings are arranged as follows e Tag settings Tag No Tag Comment Type Dec Point remain the same e Display Group Remains the same e Record Tag indexes fixed sequence are changed If a tag range is specified the numbers are sorted while maintaining the range position e Report Print RP option Tag Index numbers are
79. to start data collection Click the icon to start data collection and recording The execution interval of computation is the same as the monitor interval for PC time Controlling projects individually P page 3 4 Controlling several projects simultaneously page 3 42 3 56 3 5 3 Resetting Computation You can reset computation from the menu separately from the acquisition and recording operation On the Project menu click Reset Computing Project Operation User Help Append Mark d Reset Computing Stat Device s Computing Stop Device s Computing Reset Device s Computing L Reset amp Start Device s Computing This command appears only if the user who opened the project has operator or higher privileges and data collection computation is in progress You can also configure the software to reset computing automatically when recording is started On the Record Setting Page of the project select the Reset Math When Recording Starts check box next to Math Action a Data Logging Software admin project_a lola x File Edit View Project Operation User Help CESKA EEL Record Interval 1 Second _ Record File Type Binary O Exce O Binary amp Excel Start Condition Immediate w e poafosd H Stop Condition Continuous Number of Files Limit the Number of Files ii Folder C Users PubliciDocuments SMARTDAC Data Logging Softwa
80. type in the information to register them On the Devices List click Register Device and enter the necessary information2 in the displayed dialog box 1 For devices that cannot be detected see Note on the next page 2 For details on the input items see Register Device Dialog Box Details IM 04L65B01 01EN 3 9 Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording Searching for Network Devices Search for devices connected to the network to display them in the Online Devices List Simply click the button to search and display the devices as icons in the list Comm Kind E Ethernet CO Serial 1 Set the search filter to Ethernet or Serial lt l J Comm Kind thernet O Serial C usB Search filter 2 Click Search Comm Kind E Ethernet O Serial O uss The connected devices are detected and displayed in the Online Devices List Comm Kind E Ethernet O Serial Dk f D f px2000 2 iE GF E na am 10 1 32 85 10 1 32 120 10 1 32 130 10 1 32 115 mao f D f uR20000 uR10000 10 1 32 128 10 1 32 107 10 1 32 116 10 1 32 133 i L Fxi000 f KE 10 1 32 114 10 1 32 121 10 1 32 131 10 1 32 132 UZOR OT The icons of the following devices will not appear by searching To add them to the project use the Register Device button as explained in the next section Devices that cannot be detected on the
81. unit are updated These are entered in the recording data file at the start of recording However if PC time is specified and connection cannot be established with the device even after 3 seconds passes after the start of monitoring tag information is not updated and the channel information of the device already registered is used e When tag information is changed manually If the alarm value range unit and so on are changed on the connected device the tag information can be updated The updated information is applied to Type and Dec Point for the specified tag 1 Open the project that you want to change the tag information of e Open the project with manager or higher access privileges privileges that allow setting operation e Only projects in which data monitoring is stopped can be used IM 04L65B01 01EN 2 Select Tag in the navigation area on the left of the window Tag oy Device v n p Monitor Record Device Channel Tag No Tag Comment Type Dec Point a Tag v m0001 ad 001 Device 0001 vioo1 0001 LONG amp 4 m0002 ad 001 Device 9 0002 VI002 0002 LONG amp 4 0 m0003 O 001 Device 9 0003 vi003 0003 BOOL 0 1c c amp Display s moo04 MM 001 Device vioo4 0004 LONG 4 m0005 go 001 Device 9 0005 vioos5 0005 LONG
82. when the alarm type is set to high limit low limit difference high limit difference low limit delay high limit or delay low limit Displayed Content Description al Indicates that the alarm type is high limit or difference high limit a Indicates that the alarm type is low limit or difference low limit gJ Indicates that the alarm type is delay high limit KJ Indicates that the alarm type is delay low limit e Alarm Indicator The status of alarm level 1 alarm level 2 alarm level 3 and alarm level 4 are displayed from the left Tag alarm status is indicated in the alarm color A character that indicates the alarm type is displayed It is not shown if the display area is limited Characters that indicate alarm types section 4 5 3 You can show and hide alarm indicators section 4 3 2 4 7 UOI DIIJOD gezeg Bunoyuow Chapter 4 Monitoring Data Collection 4 5 Monitoring Alarms 4 5 3 Alarm Overview Click the Log tab The history of all monitored tags alarm occurrences and releases is displayed The top line is the most recent entry The display is automatically updated as alarms occur and are released An alarm Monitor Set displays alarm information of monitored tags in three formats 4 5 1 Group Overview group level Groups that do not have alarms set on any displayed by dividing the window for each device tags
83. you try to import a project that was compatibility with the server It will be converted to created on a GA10 with different number of channels or options The match the options configuration of the server during importing GA10 has less channels or does not have the functions If importing Continue importing you click OK import is executed to the greatest extent possible If you click Cancel importing does not take place For details see page B d W2009 Failed to add some of new channels This message appears when new devices or channels on the Devices List fail to be assigned completely to the Tag Setting Page If you click OK you can resume operation 8 2 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Error Messages Code Message Description and Solution Check for problems in the communication path to the server and IP address and port number settings E3001 Unable to connect to the specified server If you cannot connect to the server stop the server firewall or register DFMServer exe and DLGServer exe as exceptions in the server firewall configuration GA10 is connected to the server but the user information for logging in is not correct Check the user name and password that you have entered Login failed Please confirm the user name or the E3002 password Connected clients has reached maximum you can not E3003 coun Wait for the other client to log out E3004 Unable to connect to the server Check for problems i
84. 000 MV1000 MV2000 e Internal memory contains the event data file corresponding to the data loss location e The recording interval of the event data file is the same as the acquisition interval of the device e FTP transferring of files is enabled FTP server function ON Port number 21 e The multi batch function is not in use IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 8 Troubleshootin IM 04L65B01 01EN Q5 When the communication interference is eliminated the backfill function operates automatically The restored data is saved as a new file and you can view it on the Data files Page Marks that indicate that backfill has been performed are added to the beginning and end of the restored section of the data In the case of a short communication interference data loss may be restored even when the above settings are not specified In such a case GA10 does not create a new file but writes directly to the recording file The length of interruption time that makes this operation possible varies depending on the connected device Note the following points e Handling of files collected by backfilling Files collected by backfilling are the same as normal data files except for the point given below e The file division conditions specified on the recording setting page do not apply Therefore the files may become larger than normal data files e Other information e Backfill is not performed if a communication error or other error had occurred
85. 001 Tag 0001 Olndividual Set 1 Click the start tag button of Tag Range A Tag Index dialog box appears Tag Index x Crag 0007 Cag 0002 e Tag 0005 f Tag 0006 Tag 0007 Tag 0008 Tag 0013 f Tag 0014 Tag 0019 Tag 0020 Tag 0021 f Tag 0022 o Taos NO Taoa 2 Select the start tag The Tag Index dialog box closes and the start tag is updated 3 Likewise set the end tag The tag range is now set When Individual Is Used for Attached Files Attached Files Alarm Information Instantaneous Value ORange j Individual Click Setting A Select Tags dialog box appears Tag 0001 Tag 0002 C Tag 0003 Tag 0004 Tag 0005 Tag 0006 Tag 0007 C Tag 0008 Tag 0009 Tag 0010 C Tag 0011 Tag 0012 Tag 0013 Tag 0014 Tag 0015 C Tag 0016 C Tag 0017 C Tag 0018 C Tag 0019 Tag 0020 C Tag 0021 Tag 0022 C Tag 0023 C Tag 0024 Tag 0025 C Tag 0026 C Tag 0027 Tag 0028 Tag 0029 Tag 0030 _ Tag 0031 Tag 0032 Tag 0033 C Tag 0034 Tag 0035 C Tag 0036 Tag 0037 Tag 0038 C Tag 0039 Tag 0040 Cancel 2 Click the check boxes of the tags you want to select To clear a selected check box click it again 3 To apply the selections click OK To cancel click Cancel The dialog box closes and the Email Event Setting Page returns IM 04L6
86. 01 TAG 0002 T specified values AG 0003 min lt Value gt lt Value gt Minimum value among multiple specified min TAG 0001 TAG 0002 T values AG 0003 pp lt Value gt lt Value gt Maximum value minimum value pp TAG 0001 TAG 0002 TAG 0003 among multiple specified values sum lt Value gt lt Value gt Sum of multiple specified values sum TAG 0001 TAG 0002 T AG 0003 ave lt Value gt lt Value gt Average of multiple specified values ave TAG 0001 TAG 0002 T AG 0003 poly lt x gt lt a0 gt lt a1 gt lt an gt Polynomial variable parameters Calculates a0xnt ta1xn 1 anx0 poly TAG 0001 TAG 0002 T AG 0003 ceil lt Value gt Returns the minimum integer greater ceil TAG 00071 than or equal to lt Value gt floor lt Value gt Returns the maximum integer less than floor TAG 0001 or equal to lt Value gt limit lt x gt lt a gt lt b gt Rounds the value to a or b if x is limit TAG 0001 10 20 outside the range a b rnd IsNaN lt Value gt Returns a random number between 0 TAG 0001 rnd and 1 Returns 1 if lt Value gt is NaN 0 otherwise IsSNaN TAG 0001 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording IM 04L65B01 01EN Time Functions The following table shows the available time functions Math constan
87. 01 01EN are registered only None is displayed UZOR OO O O e You can create template files tpl using SMARTDAC Report Template Builder You can download it from the YOKOGAWA website for free e Ifthe template file is set to None custom print is not possible e Excel templates cannot be used for custom print i idddddcddddddddddddddaadddaddaddddddddadddddadadddddadadddddddddddddddadddddddaddadddddaadddddddddddddddddddda 5 Printer Displays a list of printers registered in the server 3 65 Bulpiooay pue UO DAIJOD eyeg Hulyieyg pue Hulinbiyuoy Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 66 6 Output Language Specify the language for the printed materials The date format and decimal point format vary depending on the language See Language vs Date Format and Decimal Point Format provided earlier 7 Graph 1 to 4 Print Type Select the type of graph defined in the template file e Options None Trend Graph Alarm List Mark List Range Set the print target data range Schedule Conditions and Range Group Specify the number of the group to print Only the valid group numbers groups that are assigned tags among Group 01 to 50 are displayed as options Printout Setup Same as Printout Setup on page 3 63 See the items in the table ZTO The graph output varies depending on the defined size as follows e Fora trend graph all trends in the setting range are output according t
88. 01 to 001 to 100 fixed Report channel number Click a No R100 cell to select the row b Tag Index1 Valid Tag range including math tags Select the tag Click the tag to display tags are of the project the Tag Index dialog box Then click assigned in the tag you want to specify ascending order C Sum scale Off Off sec min hour day Displays the sum scale of the report channel d Auto increment button None R001 to R100 Assigns tag indexes in ascending order from the first tag in the selected range e All On button None R001 to R100 Clicking the button collectively turns on the sum scales in the selected range To select a tag click a tag button under Tag Index and select the tag from the displayed dialog box shown below If the Math function MT option is installed you can also select math tags Tag 0003 C__Tago00g Tag 0005 Tag 0006 C Twos _ Tag 0009 Tag 0010 Tag 0011 Tag 0012 Tag 0013 Tag 0014 Tag 0015 Tag 0016 Tag 0017 Tag 0018 LO i Tanana O 11 Graph 1 to 4 Print Type Select the type of graph defined in the template file e Options None Trend Graph Alarm List Mark List Range Set the target data range Schedule Conditions and Range Group Specify the number of the group to print Only the valid group numbers groups that are assigned tags among Group 01 to 50 are displayed as options Printout Setup Same as in Standard Print Printout Setup on page 3 63 See
89. 1 BOOL O0 m0012 001 Device MC_0102_ V1012 0012 BOOL 0O m0013 Ml 001 Device 0103 ET 0013 BOOL o0 m0014 001 Device 104 vio14 0014 BOOL 0 5 Selected range On the Project menu click Update Tag Information A confirmation message appears Click OK Type and Dec Point information of the selected tags is updated Note amma e Even if you execute Update Tag Information the tag settings specified on the GA10 are not changed e In following situations an error message will be displayed e Some of the connected devices cannot communicate with the server e The number of registered devices on the server is at the maximum e Ifthe A D scan interval and the FIFO writing interval of the device are not the same the following devices cannot be updated by a user To update log in as an administrator DX1000 DX1000N DX1000T DX2000 DX2000T MV1000 MV2000 CX1000 CX2000 FX1000 Lx hh sb ddbsti ddccccdddccccddddccdddddadadddde 3 19 Buipsosay pue uona gaq Buljels pue Bulinbyu045 D Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 3 4 Setting Display Groups The GA10 Monitor Page can display multiple channels in groups The Display Group Setting Page is used to group channels and set the tag data display method The Display Group Setting Page consists of multiple tabbed pages Each tabbed page shows the settings of each waveform in rows and the s
90. 3 PC System Requirements Hardware Item Description CPU Pentium 4 3 2 GHz or faster Internal memory 2 GB or more Hard disk 100 MB or more of free space NTFS recommended Mouse Mouse compatible with the OS Display 1024 x 768 dots or higher 65536 colors or more Communication ports RS 232 or Ethernet port compatible with the OS To perform RS 232 communication or RS 422 485 communication with a connected device the server PC needs a RS 232 serial port A USB port is required for USB communication Operation is not guaranteed if you use the converter cables such as USB to serial for the communication Operating System Os Edition 32 bit 64 bit Service Pack Windows Vista Home Premium Yes No SP2 Windows 7 Home Premium Yes Yes SP1 Professional Yes Yes SP1 Windows 8 1 Update Yes Yes No SP Pro Yes Yes No SP Windows Server 2008 R2 No Yes SP1 Windows Server 2012 No Yes No SP Other Operating Environment Item Description Microsoft Office Excel 2007 2010 2013 Adobe Reader Adobe Reader X latest version recommended RS 232 RS 422 485 converter To perform RS 422 485 communication with a connected device use a converter YOKOGAWA ML2 recommended Use Microsoft Office Excel 2010 or later to view Excel reports generated with the Report Print function RP option jyOnpojd 34 Huis 310499 i Chapter 1 Before Using the Product 1
91. 3s Ao ize Gees il Good g Record Interval 1Second ss _ v Record File Type Binary O Excel O Binary amp Excel i Ta y Start Condition Alarm TagRange Tag 0001 Tag 0100 e G S e Level1 Level2 Level3 Level4 _ Alarm Change OFF to ON od Display Stop Condition Continuous QS ee a File Division None i amp Roca v Number of Files Limit the Number of Files 4 Ur D 4 Folder C Users Public iDocuments SMARTDAC Data Logging Software Data Project B1 Refer to es File Name 8 Data Attach the Date Attach the Time Z Ea Accessaothers a No Title String B 2 T amp a x 5 E 6 Z 8 1 Record Interval 4 Stop Condition Select the interval from the drop down list You can specify the following for the stop condition Options 100 Millisecond 200 Millisecond 500 Stop Condition Description Millisecond 1 Second 2 Second 5 Second 10 Second Continuous Stops recording when the Stop Recording button 20 Second 30 Second 1 Minute 2 Minute 5 Minute 10 ___ lS eloked ___ Minut Specified Time Stops recording at the specified time If the start nu e condition is set to Alarm or Level GA10 enters a The intervals that are displayed in the list are integer recording standby state multiples of the collection period specified on the Monitor Specified Stops recording when the specified time elapses Page If Data time is set to Device time you cannot Duration after recording
92. 483648 to 2147483647 ____ Conversion source value _ string Up to 15 Unicode characters Conversion target value To convert to a value specify the value using a character string A Mandatory item However for attribute name Register node name Type is not mandatory B Mandatory item to use the option C Mandatory item to convert data 1 If only a mask is available bit mask is applied to the data value read from the register and the result is handled as TRUE or FALSE 2 Decimal and Hexadecimal integers are supported For hexadecimals the number must be preceded by a 0x 3 Fora description of Data Type see the table below 4 These are retrieved from registers or the definition file The user can specify either one or both In the latter case register information takes precedence 5 Scaling calculation Y ScaleRatio X ScaleOffset X Modbus register value after decimal point calculation after conversion is a value conversion table is available Y Computed result 6 Channel data status is processed in the following order of precedence ADError DataError Burnout PlusOver MinusOver 7 If the burnout type is set to DownScale type value is 2 and the burnout status is 1 the data status will be BURNOUT If the burnout type is set to UpScale type value is not 2 and the burnout status is 1 the data status will be BURNOUT 8 Node channels include optional attributes When registering a device in the Register
93. 5B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording Note wmmuiuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuiuiidid Behavior When Sending Email When Alarms On a GA10 with the Math function MT option a Math Occur tag page is displayed in the Tag Index Select alarm and Select Tags dialog boxes The following figure shows an example of a Math tag page in the Select alarm dialog If email send condition is set to Alarm Status note the following points box e The timing for sending email is different when Data time is set to PC time and when Data time is set to Device time Tag 0001 Level1 Level2 Level3 Level4 io a its 0002 Levelt Level2 Level3 Level4 PC time Level3 Tag 0003 Level1 Tag 0004 Level1 Tag 0005 Level1 Tag 0006 Level1 Tag 0007 Level1 Tag 0008 Levelt Tag 0009 Levelt Level2 Level4 Level2 Level3 The specified tag range is assumed to be a single group If any of the alarms of the tags in the group occurs an email is sent Device time The specified tag range is grouped by device or interval If any of the alarms of the tags in the group occurs an email is sent Level4 B lel le le Is Level4 Level4 Level2 Level3 Level2 sl Level3 Level3 Level3 E E Level2 E Level4 Level2 E Level4 c E
94. 7 Data 20131119091448 did 300 1 Second 2013 11 19 09 14 48 000 2013 11 19 09 19 47 000 31160 Data 20131119090948 did 300 1 Second 2013 11 19 09 09 48 000 2013 11 19 09 14 47 000 31160 Data 20131119090448 did 300 1 Second 2013 11 19 09 04 48 000 2013 11 19 09 09 47 000 31160 B C Data 20131119090254 did 65 1 Second 2013 11 19 09 02 54 000 2013 11 19 09 03 58 000 18000 C k D e ete Data 20131119085754 did 300 1 Second 2013 11 19 08 57 54 000 2013 11 19 09 02 53 000 31160 x Data 20131119085653 did 7 1 Second 2013 11 19 08 56 53 000 2013 11 19 08 56 59 000 14752 a Data 20131118171320 did 199 1 Second 2013 11 18 17 13 20 000 2013 11 18 17 16 38 000 25504 A CO nfi rm ation d ialo box a ea rs Data 20131118171100 did 126 1 Second 2013 11 18 17 11 00 000 2013 11 18 17 13 05 000 21416 7 Data 20131118170100 did 600 1 Second 2013 11 18 17 01 00 000 2013 11 18 17 10 59 000 47960 Data 20131118165100 did 600 1 Second 2013 11 18 16 51 00 000 2013 11 18 17 00 59 000 47960 Data 20131118164100 did 600 1 Second 2013 11 18 16 41 00 000 2013 11 18 16 50 59 000 47960 Data 20131118163736 did 203 1 Second 2013 11 18 16 37 36 000 2013 11 18 16 40 58 000 25728 C C k O K Data 20131118162736 did 600 1 Second 2013 11 18 16 27 36 000 2013 11 18 16 37 35 000 47960 3 Data 20131118161736 did 600 1 Second 2013 11 18 16 17 36 000 2013 11 18 16 27 35 000 47960 P Data 20131118160003 did 475 1 Second 2013 11 18 16 00 03 000 2013 11 18 16 07 57 000 40960 The fi
95. 9 07 14 13 41 Shortcut 2 KB He Ip me configure service startup options a Data Sources ODBC 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut 2KB E Event Viewer 2009 07 14 13 42 Shortcut 2 KB Service status Started feh iSCSI Initiator 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut 2 KB Fa Local Security Policy 2013 06 19 15 16 Shortcut 2 KB le Stop Gauss RESUME Performance Monitor 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut 2 KB You can specify the start parameters that apply when you start the service lath Print Management 2013 06 19 15 16 Shortcut 2 KB from here fay Services 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut 2KB g fay System Configuration 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut 2 KB sie parame Ears Task Scheduler 2009 07 14 13 42 Shortcut 2KB P Windows Firewall with Advanced Security 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut 2 KB fag Windows Memory Diagnostic 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut 2 KB oe Windows PowerShell Modules 2009 07 14 13 52 Shortcut 3 KB k Pi 3 Click the Startup type arrow and click Manual 3 Double click Services The Services window appears r DLGServer Properties Local Computer General Log On Recovery Dependencies Service name DLGServer File Action View Help e s 0 o blu m gt au mp Sh Services Local Display name DLGServer Description SMARTDAG Data Logging Software Server Select an item to view its description Name Description Startup Type Log On As f S4 ActiveX Installer Provides Us Manual Local S
96. A4 Portrait Orientation O Landscape Output Language English In a Standard Print schedule set the following items 1 Name Enter the name of the schedule e Default value Report01 to Report 20 e Input range Enter a text string using up to 30 characters 2 Task Select Standard Print e Options None Standard Print Custom Print Report Print 3 Condition From the list select the time to execute printing e Default value 00 00 00 every day e Options Every Hour Everyday Every Week Every Month Interval Recording is finished The range 4 will vary depending on this condition 4 Range Set the target data range For details see Schedule Conditions and Range described later 5 Print Type Select the print type from the list e Default value Trend Graph e Options Trend Graph Circular Sheet Alarm List Mark List IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 6 Group Specify the range of display groups to print using group numbers e Default value 01 01 e Input range Enter the display group numbers in the range of Group 01 to 50 Enter them so that the start group number is less than the end group number 7 Print Header Click the Detail button and click the items you want to print in the Print Header Detail dialog box shown below For File Name the character strings of Schedule Name and Date will be output Print Header C File Name
97. ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjnh cryptsoft com IM 04L65B01 01EN vV vi Contents PAE OCMC HOUT ee vias datacvani S E E scwenkncondddnostenondchetnneneenes i HowTo Use ThS Mantal essasi a a E EErEE ES i Software License AGrEOMen cccccssscccccssececccesseccccuseeecceussececseuececsueueecessueceesseueeeesseseeeessuseeessaaeress ii Using Open Source Software een een er eee Rene ee ee ae en eee er ee IV Chapter 1 Before Using the Product 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 VEION a E A iaduapmoaaitdadeuxtanssuamiatiteadipd iat oandar 1 1 MODEL and SUFFIX Codes a cccagucieanarionatPnateesasaiutduimtaausiaacocmaisiaisekeodanPeavevemsaisadinuelsausieantitots 1 5 PC System RequireMent cccccccccccssssceccessecececesecccccuseeeceeegeeeessseeeeseeeeessegseeessesseeesseaes 1 5 TVS TVA MNT NC UNS EE ected raise A EES ta andes AE AE E N A E 1 6 Chapter 2 Preparation 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 5 2 6 2 1 Preparation from Installation up to Data Collection and Recording ccccceseeeeeeeeeeees 2 1 o O ecn cle reaches etre teada ey osu eqatacaea a re vonceeeiantegeateacadenssos es 2 2 LOGOO I eee e A E E E E E 2 3 Registenng MI SOUS ve satasnctiatoanccsetuanen enpersiancaranuctasmeevotonwaus RE Ei REAT AE EAEE EE ANENE EER 2 4 creano
98. ASED IN WARRANTY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR ANY OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE GROUNDS IN NO EVENT YOKOGAWA AND SUPPLIER S AGGREGATE LIABILITY FOR ANY CAUSE OF ACTION WHATSOEVER INCLUDING LIABILITY UNDER CLAUSE 5 SHALL EXCEED THE DEPRECIATED VALUE OF THE LICENSE FEE PAID TO YOKOGAWA FOR THE USE OF THE CONCERNED PART OF THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT If the Software Product delivered by Yokogawa is altered modified or combined with other software or is otherwise made different from Yokogawa catalogues General Specifications basic specifications functional specifications or manuals without Yokogawa s prior written consent Yokogawa shall be exempted from its obligations and liabilities under this Agreement or law 6 2 Any claim against Yokogawa based on any cause of action under or in relation to this Agreement must be given in writing to Yokogawa within three 3 months after the cause of action accrues 7 Export Control You agree not to export or provide to any other countries whether directly or indirectly the Software Product in whole or in part without prior written consent of Yokogawa If Yokogawa agrees such exportation or provision you shall comply with the export control and related laws regulations and orders of Japan the United States of America and any other applicable countries and obtain export import permit and take all necessary procedures under your own responsibility and at your own exp
99. B01 01EN 4 9 Controlling Devices during Data Collection 4 9 1 Controlling Device Computation from GA10 On the Project menu click Start Device s Computing Stop Device s Computing Reset Device s Computing or Reset amp Start Device s Computing Computation is collectively controlled on the devices that meet the following conditions e Devices that are in the Device List of the project e Devices that have computation functionality e Devices that support Start Device s Computing Stop Device s Computing Reset Device s Computing or Reset amp Start Device s Computing Clear amp Start Computing Connected Start Stop Clear Device Comp Comp Comp Software UR10000 Yes Yes No Yes UR20000 DX1000 Yes Yes Yes Yes DX1000N DX1000T DX2000 Yes Yes Yes Yes DX2000T MV 1000 Yes Yes Yes Yes MV2000 CX1000 Yes Yes Yes Yes CX2000 FX1000 Yes Yes Yes Yes MX100 MW100 No No No No DA100 DR130 Yes Yes Yes Yes DR230 DR240 GX10 Yes Yes Yes Yes GX20 GP10 GP20 DAQLOGGER No No No No DAQ32Plus MXLOGGER Devices No No No No supporting the Modbus protocol Yes Supported No Not supported When connected over an Ethernet network the user registered in the device must have privileges to use computation for this feature to work UOI DIIJOD eJeg Bunoyuow Chapter 4 Monitoring Data Collection 4 10 Things to Consider 4 10 1Time Zone and Day
100. Click Setting in the device information area The corresponding setting Web page will appear in Windows Internet Explorer For instructions on how to use the Web application see the GX GP User s Manual IM 04L51B01 01EN or the GM User s Manual IM 04L55B01 01EN URL www smartdacplus com manual en 3 13 Buipiosay pue uona gq Bunes pue BulnByu05 2 Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording Limitations on the Device Setting Page e The following operations cannot be executed on the Device Setting Page while data collection is in progress e Register devices from the Registered Devices List to the Devices List e Register devices from the Online Devices List to the Devices List e Register a new device on the Devices List e Change device registration positions on the Devices List e Delete registered devices from the Devices List e Change the settings of devices on the Devices List e The Web application can be started only when the connected device is GX GP and the interface is Ethernet e If multiple devices use the same COM port observe the following rules e Do not mix Modbus devices with other devices e Use the same communication type e Use the same settings for baud rate parity and stop bit 3 14 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 3 3 Setting Tags GA10 collects and records data from multiple connected devices Tags are assigned t
101. Conferencing Add in for Microsoft Office Outlook Microsoft Corporation 2013 06 19 E Microsoft Forefront Client Security Microsoft Corporation 2013 07 12 E Microsoft Forefront Client Security ME Microsoft Corporation 2013 07 12 a Microsoft Office Communicator 2007 Microsoft Corporation 2013 06 19 a Microsoft Office Communicator 2007 MUI Microsoft Corporation 2013 06 19 Bs Microsoft Office JIS90 Microsoft Corporation 2013 06 19 Qs Microsoft Office Language Pack 2010 English Microsoft Corporation 2013 06 20 microsoft Office Live Meeting 2007 Microsoft Corporation 2013 06 19 B3 Microsoft Office Professional Plus 2010 Microsoft Corporation 2013 06 19 Microsoft Operations Manager M Microsoft Corporation 2013 07 12 Microsoft Visio Viewer 2010 Microsoft Corporation 2013 06 19 Microsoft Visual C 2005 Redistributable Microsoft Corporation 2013 07 19 Microsoft Visual C 2008 Redistributable x86 9 0 30729 4148 Microsoft Corporation 2013 07 19 m Microsoft Visual C 2010 x86 Redistributable 10 0 40219 Microsoft Corporation 2013 06 19 2013 06 19 2013 06 19 2013 06 19 2013 06 19 Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2013 12 10 Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2013 08 05 2013 07 23 2013 07 23 2013 10 25 2013 11 20 10 3 MB Support link http www yokogawa co jp ns ss ns cs Yokogawa Electric Corporation Product version Help link http www yokogawa Yes Do y
102. D IF APPLICABLE 1 Scope This Agreement applies to the following software products and associated documentation of Yokogawa collectively Software Product Unless otherwise provided by Yokogawa this Agreement applies to the updates and upgrades of the Software Product which may be provided by Yokogawa Software Product SMARTDAC Data Logging Software Model GA10 2 Grant of License 2 1 Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement Yokogawa hereby grants to you a non exclusive and non transferable right to use the Software Product on a single or the following specified number of computer s and solely for your internal operation use in consideration of full payment by you to Yokogawa of the license fee separately agreed upon Granted number of License the number of purchases 2 2 Unless otherwise agreed or provided by Yokogawa in writing the following acts are prohibited a to reproduce the Software Product exce pt for one archival copy for backup purpose which shall be maintained with due care subject to this Agreement b to sell lease distribute transfer pledge sublicense make available via the network or otherwise convey the Software Product or the license granted herein to any other person or entity c to use the Software Product on any unauthorized computer via the network d to cause permit or attempt to dump disassemble decompile reverse engineer or otherwise translate or reproduce the Software Product into
103. E 3 54 G Group LINK soepie EOE 4 2 CO ote E E E E E E A 1 6 LATO erraria E S a 3 6 3 18 L IM 04L51B01 01EN langUagE sae cccanensadntccbsuscsientcsneatseenss i 1 7 2 10 3 34 3 64 5 2 Lock State sensn e E A EEEa ah 6 5 8 8 Eerskolcllans Gx ARITE AE E E E 4 15 HOG OUI RE E A A A N E A ae 2 3 6 3 Me Mail Setting Page wiiecaisacnbucniaisaveniatneusaveneidiventemcbnaveandbennss 3 31 POA ea E E cohsranenndea asia deta endless 3 38 manual report output wecsccsdesecsssatmscenesandaradeneadextienesd anaraceabecsadened 5 5 MAK ee te Bett a r EEEE EEES 3 25 4 6 MAN CONSAN aeni raa 3 52 Math function 1 5 2 9 3 24 3 30 3 37 3 50 3 69 5 8 8 2 DUZUNA AG PA E E E E A A E 3 24 3 37 3 50 PFS TO PE E EE AEE E EE A EE EE EE T 1 6 Meter SOI Ay icica si ccuncttdcssacemuns iin tadeenuseatui san gntateseMnravenecusait 4 7 MOODUS ceas Ereann EATER E EEEREN 3 42 Modbus device definition file cccccceeeececeseeeeseeeeeeeeees 3 42 Modify Basic Information sdcccsctstoasccanseviambtnaenctsnrantedetndcosian 3 8 Monitor Data SQ b arscicsncscazeranciaincincnacanteneniedesnarnaaneetaeweienis 3 26 Montor Pagesos E S ea eer 3 23 N 016 o E 3 43 O gt OPC UA server function 00 0 0 cece eeceeec secu eeeeeeeeee sees 1 5 2 9 7 1 GDI Al OF EINTE EEE T E E TE EE 3 53 SE ANON eee E a 3 38 OPIO ena ee EAE 2 9 output IANQUAGE cccceeeeceeeeeeeees 3 64 3 66 3 69 5 4 5 7 OWING vestiarnctordos en steerer cine sane eapul
104. EN Chapter 1 Before Using the Product Features to improve reliability GA10 features the following functions to ensure reliable data collection Data supplementing function Backfill function If a data dropout occurs in the data file that is being recorded due to a communication interference this function automatically acquires data from the internal memory of the device and restores the data loss in the file Data dropout yONpojg au Buisp 310499 Bi Several conditions must be met for the backfill function to operate properly For details see Q4 on page 8 6 Auto reconnection when communication is disconnected If the communication is disconnected and data collection is interrupted communication retry is performed every approximately 30 seconds When communication recovers the server resumes data collection and recording This allows data loss to be kept to a minimum Protection of data files up to the moment of power failure GA10 writes to the data file every approximately 10 seconds This reduces the chances of the data file being lost in the event the PC shuts down unexpectedly Convenient Features e You can use the Simple Settings feature to easily start data collection e You can set the data timestamp to PC time or Device time e The DDE Dynamic Data Exchange server feature allows collected data to be loaded into Excel and other applications e GA10 has a trial mode that can be used for 60 days without a
105. Function UA option 7 2 2 Project Tab An OPC UA server project consists of a setting page and status page Depending on the privileges of the user who opened the project and the lock status if the setting page is enabled the setting page appears Otherwise the status page appears The following figure shows the OPC UA server project tab Unlike normal projects the record button and buttons for displaying the Monitor Page and Data files Page are not available Project icon and project name Status indication monitoring a o D I Start monitoring e hi c x e Stop monitoring t e Setting Page e Status Page Item Name Description Condition Status Indicates the project status The None indication behavior is the same as that for typical projects Icon OPC UA server icon None Project name OPC UA None Disabled ina locked state Disabled for monitor users Start Monitoring A button for starting or stopping button monitoring The behavior is the same as that for typical projects If monitoring starts the Status Page will appear Clicking the Start Monitoring button starts the OPC UA server If the server fails to start error message E3069 will appear 7 2 3 Setting Pages An OPC UA server project consists of Device Tag Math Tag Server Operation and Access amp Others Setting Pages Device Tag Math Tag and Access amp Others are the same f
106. GATO Data STUCIUTG eee rere mC emer cre ae ert Te ener n ee nt mre Ser ne ee meets armen re 7 2 1 1 3 Server Certificate Operations ccccccccccccccseeceeecseeeceeceeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseaaeeeeseaeeeseeaeeeees 7 3 1 2 OPC UA Server Proje Cece sasoecessestace densi An Ena AREE aAa ASe Ae EE AEE E AEEA AEAEE 7 4 7 2 1 POCE ELISE AE enron IEE r a EREEREER O AER SEER APENE 7 4 7 2 2 Projecti ADoser e ETE ETE aT EE 7 5 7 2 3 E S FS E EE A AAE AA E E E E E A E T 7 5 viii IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Appendix Index IM 04L65B01 01EN 7 2 4 120 Contents Server Setting Page dc ccexatecnacadenescaniaieaaisandatadenenentay sonamnsdedudguenuosnadead docdeninanuessabncbadeaateansaanied 7 7 US Page ge eteet caravan pe a E 7 12 8 1 Messages That GA10 May Display cccccccssscceccesseeecsesseeeceessceesceasesesseeeeesseeaeessseaes 8 1 ES Ae E AE E A A E EE E E A E cia PE E TEE E O E 8 1 Warming Messages a cee ceca ees ee a E E 8 2 EOE NES A SS e eects cee cecteccceee stage wea career ereere O catnee neerencetece 8 3 8 2 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ oi ccscc csi ccc Ssessecdanbendsamnstacdbenctnnact SSousenecesaccteedsiianeeeevcdeeniee 8 6 Q1 Can the server and client be installed and run in the same PO sssssssesseeseenennrsrereeen 8 6 Q2 Is there a way to back up the recording data files automatically cccccceeeeseeeeeeees 8 6 Q3 The communication between the server and the data acquisi
107. GAWA dealer e Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without YOKOGAWA s permission is strictly prohibited Trademarks e vigilantplant and SMARTDAC are registered trademarks of Yokogawa Electric Corporation e Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries e Modbus is a registered trademark of AEG Schneider e Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated e Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and or other countries e Kerberos is a trademark of Massachusetts Institute of Technology MIT e Company and product names that appear in this manual are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders e The company and product names used in this manual are not accompanied by the registered trademark or trademark symbols and Ath Edition April 2015 YK All Right Reserved Copyright 2014 2015 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 04L65B01 01EN How to Use This Manual Structure of the Manual This manual contains the following chapters Chap Title Description Provides an overview of Data Logging Software GA10 It also explains the main specifications of the software and the PC system requirements Preparing to Collect and Provides a flowchart and the procedure to prepare Before Using the l Product
108. Inthe above figure column B is intentionally set to display the expressions After you enter the expressions save the Excel file and close it On the GA10 s File menu click Start DDE The DDE server starts on the PC running the GA10 client In the Project List Page double click the project that you want to use the DDE server with to open the project Change the project setting window to the Access amp Others Setting Page Set DDE Server to ON DDE server Select ON EMH Dy SiR RH ON OFF DDE 4 O OFF Start the DDE server and data collection Click IM to start data collection Start collection and recording P section 3 2 4 section 3 3 11 IM 04L65B01 01EN 9 Open the Excel file If a message appears asking you whether to update the links update them The collected data will be displayed in Excel cells B 2 Date 2014 8 20 3 Time 15 44 09 4 msec 0 5 No 181 6 tag0004 1 6294 7 tagQ015 0 6 tag0016 0 10 To stop the DDE server on the File menu click Stop DDE A IMPORTANT e While DDE is running do not change the project name topic name e To save files using Excel as a DDE client set Files of type to Excel 97 2003 book xls Note gamut e If data collected by the DDE server is in error it is output using indications other than values For the different types of error data see section 4 10 2 e The time
109. LOGGER DAQLOGGER and DAQ32Plus Moreover it supports the Modbus protocol enabling data collection from YOKOGAWA s control instruments temperature controllers signal conditioners and power monitors GA10 can also collect data from other manufacturers devices that support Modbus communication Data Logging Software Server Client Client EEE L Data collection Convener RS 232 Operation Data collection Data collection Ethernet MXLOGGER DAQLOGGER DAQ32Plus GateWT for GA10 Instruments supporting Ethernet communication RS 422 485 ommunication Instruments 7 supporting RS 232 Source devices for Instruments communication MXLOGGER data supporting Modbus collection communication Source devices for DAQLOGGER data collection Source devices for DAQ32Plus data collection MXLOGGER DAQLOGGER DAQ32Plus are YOKOGAWA s data collection applications GateWT for GA10 is YOKOGAWA s driver software 1 1 yONpojg au Buisp 310499 Chapter 1 Before Using the Product Data Collection Project GA10 collects data in units of projects Projects are created by users to suite their purposes For example a project named Process A can be created to collect measured data from a process called A In this way a project can be created for each set of collected data For each project the data t
110. Lt ee ite A 10 1 32 115 E 28 r mm Acknowledge gt 005 006 007 pos 10 1 32 128 10 1 32 107 10 1 32 115 10 1 32 130 ide nent tine 2 Li FX1000 DX1000 uR20000 ___uR10000 E5 5 lt zan 009 po 014 012 10 1 32 131 10 1 32 123 10 1 32 116 10 1 32 108 f DX2000 uR10000 x1000 x2000 x us EJ p13 p p15 016 m 10 1 32 124 10 1 32 133 10 1 32 117 10 1 32 134 ma fA MX100 MX100 GX20 a E a 0 017 018 019 020 10 1 32 136 10 1 32 106 10 1 32 127 10 1 32 121 GX10 GP10 mw100 ed Device Name Meas Ch EEG Device Type DX2000 Math Ch Version No Ctrl Ch Comm Address 10 1 32 115 Extra Ch Monitor Record Interval 1 Second Folder C AUsers Public Documents SMARTDAC Data Logging Software Data Project_A1 CReterto e To delete a registered device click the device icon to select it and click Delete on the Edit menu You can also select the device icon and press the DELETE key e Further you can select a device icon on the Devices List and double click it to edit the item The items that you can change in this dialog box are the same as those in the Register Device dialog box when you register devices Register Device Dialog Box Details P page 3 11 3 3 Buipsosay pue uona gq Bunes pue Bulinbyuo0y a Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 2 3 Setting the Monitor and Record Interval and Save Destination
111. Of Y26 Detail Linear M F ON 0w Y27 Detail Linear M F OU 0w Y28 Detail Linear M F COM Of Y29 Detail Linear M F OU Of TSS Y30 Detail Linear M F OH Of Y31 Detail Linear M F Of Of Y32 Detail Linear M F COM Of Action bar Use to collectively edit the settings Scroll bars of the selected lines Basic Operation 1 Select Display Group in the navigation area on the left of the window The Display Group Setting Page appears 2 Click the tab of the group you want to configure Q Edit the setup data Click the No cells left most column to show or hide the waveforms Details of settings B gt The details are provided on page 3 21 and subsequent pages Use the numbers in the figure to reference the corresponding descriptions UZOQ On the initial Display Group Setting Page tags are assigned automatically for each device when there are tags specified as data collection channels on the Tag Setting Page If you want to perform Assign Tag Automatically again do this first before setting the displays iii ddd ddcccdcdddddddddccddaddddddddddddddaaadaddddddddddadcaadadddddddddddddaadaaddddddddddaadaddddddddddddddddadacddada 3 20 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording Specify the group name Group tab number 3 Specify the Y axis 4 Select fixed point or floating point d
112. Product trade mark copyright or other intellectual property rights Claim you shall promptly notify Yokogawa thereof in writing 5 2 If the infringement is attributable to Yokogawa Yokogawa will defend you from the Claim at Yokogawa s expense and indemnify you from the damages finally granted by the court or otherwise agreed by Yokogawa out of court The foregoing obligation and indemnity of Yokogawa shall be subject to that i you promptly notify Yokogawa of the Claim in writing as provided above ii you grant to Yokogawa and its designees the full authority to control the defense and settlement of such Claim and iii you give every and all necessary information and assistance to Yokogawa upon Yokogawa s request IM 04L65B01 01EN Software Licensing Agreement 5 3 If Yokogawa believes that a Claim may be made or threatened Yokogawa may at its option and its expense either a procure for you the right to continue using the Software Product b replace the Software Product with other software product to prevent infringement c modify the Software Product in whole or in part so that it become non infringing or d if Yokogawa believes that a through c are not practicable terminate this Agreement and refund you the paid up amount of the book value of the Software Product as depreciated 5 4 Notwithstanding the foregoing Yokogawa shall have no obligation nor liability for and you shall defend and indemnify Yokogawa and its suppliers f
113. Q9 on page 8 8 e The timestamps attached to data in PC time mode are determined so that data collection would always occur at 0 00 am 00 00 00 CLA The difference between setting the Data time to PC time and setting the Data time to Device time is also described in Q12 on page 8 9 b Monitor Interval Click the arrow and select from the following intervals If Data time is set to Device time you cannot specify the Scan Interval Interval 100 Millisecond 200 Millisecond 500 Millisecond 1 Second 2 Second 5 Second 10 Second 20 Second 30 Second 1 Minute 2 Minute 5 Minute 10 Minute IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recordin IM 04L65B01 01EN c Pre set mark Specify text strings to assign to marks if you want to add marks on the Trend Monitor Page You can assign up to 16 characters to each mark You can register up to five marks When you register text strings here they appear in a list on the Monitor Page as shown below allowing you to easily add marks When you register text strings here Mark_02 they appear in the mark list on the Monitor Page If you click the mark appears on the monitoring page And if you click a the marks appear on all monitoring pages Monitor area e Split Screen Direction d Monitor Data Set Number h Resize the Monitor Set Monitor Monitor Data Set Number 2 Resize the Monitor Set ON O OFF
114. QOQOCOOOOO0O0OO0OO0oc The administrator can clear the Keep Lock state if there is some reason in which data collection must be stopped To clear the Keep Lock state gt page 6 5 hhh sddddddcddddddcaaddddddaaddddddaddddddddddadddaddadadadaddddddde 3 40 3 3 10Using the DDE Server Feature GA10 supports the DDE Dynamic Data Exchange Server feature which is used to send data to other applications By using a DDE client to access the DDE server you can retrieve the tag values that are being collected in the project You can begin retrieving the data from a DDE client after the DDE server starts Retrievable Description Information Date The date when the data was collected Time The time when the data was collected excluding the millisecond Millisecond The millisecond when the data was collected Data number The serial number of the data The first data value collected when data collection is started is number zero Value The collected tag value The application name topic name and item name that are used to retrieve data are shown below Item Text String to Specify and Output Information Application name DLGDDE fixed Topic name Specify the name of the target project Item Date date Outputs the date as a text string name The date format is YYYY MM DD Time time Outputs the time as a text string The time format is hh mm ss Millisecond
115. Split Screen Direction Horizontal Alarm Shape O oo i i Al arm S h a pe Set Number in Spliting Direction 1 amp Alarm Color OFF iia ON a j Alarm Color Split Screen Data Set No Split Screen Data set 1_ Trend C72 Digital ic f Set Number in Splitting Direction g Split Screen Data Set 3 25 Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording Configuring the Monitor Page The GA10 Monitor Page can display four types of displays referred to as Monitor Data Sets trend digital meter and alarm A total of up to 16 monitors can be arranged on the Monitor Page To display multiple Monitor Data Sets simultaneously specify how to divide the page and where to arrange each Monitor Data Set When you specify items d to g below a display layout appears in the Monitor Set Layout area By dragging the splitters that appear between rows and columns when you move the pointer over the boundaries you can adjust the size of Monitor Data Sets d Monitor Data Set Number Select a number between 1 and 16 e Split Screen Direction Set the direction to arrange the Monitor Sets to Horizontal or Vertical f Set Number in Splitting Direction Select a number between 1 and 16 Options that exceeds the Monitor Data Set Number are not displayed g Split Screen Data Set Assign Trend Digital Meter or Alarm to each Monitor Data Set The Monitor Dat
116. Status O Comm Status O Specified Period O Specified Duration File is created TRIG O Easy TagRange Lag 00014 aq 000 Levelli w Level2 ww Level4 ww Detail 7 Click Setting A Select alarm dialog box appears Tag 0001 CI Tag 0002 C Tag 0003 Tag 0004 Tag 0005 Tag 0006 Tag 0007 Tag 0008 C Tag 0009 C Tag 0010 C Tag 0011 LI Tag 0012 C Tag 0013 C Tag 0014 C Tag 0015 J Tag 0016 2 Click the check boxes of the tags you want to select Level1 Level Levelt Level1 Level1 Level Levelt Level1 Level1 Level Level1 Level1 Level1 Level1 Level1 Level1 3 S o e el g Level2 Level2 Level2 Level2 Level2 Level2 Level2 Level2 Level2 Level2 Level2 Level2 Level2 Level2 Level2 Level2 3 0 g Level3 Level3 Level3 Level3 Level3 Level3 Level3 Level3 6 e g Level3 Level3 Level3 Level3 To clear a selected check box click it again Level3 Level3 Level3 Level3
117. Their Information to set a password 6 3 siasp BuiHeuew Chapter 6 Managing Users 6 4 2 Deleting a User You cannot delete a user that is logged in We recommend that you check the user access privileges before deleting the user 1 Follow steps 1 and 2 in section 6 2 to display the User Management Page 2 Select the user you want to delete The user is selected 3 On the Edit menu click Delete Or click the icon A warning message appears Warming A Do you want to delete this user User1 W2001 OK Cancel 4 To proceed click OK The user will be deleted 6 4 3 Changing a Project Owner If you delete an owner user If the administrator deletes a user the access privileges granted to the user is lost If the deleted user had been a project owner the project will no longer have any owner This condition is displayed as follows ES Project 4 Displays a dash when there is no owner To change a project owner specify a new owner follow the procedure below Mo WC Only the owner of the relevant project or the administrator can change the owner A 1 Display the Project List Page On the View menu click Project List Page Or click the 8 icon 2 Select the project you want to change 3 On the Project menu click Modify Owner A Change Project s Owner dialog box appears Change Project s Owner dialog box 4 From the New Owner list select a user
118. Time Standard Print Custom Print Report Output Daily Prev Week Same as above Weekly Sunday Report 0 00 00 to Current Week Sunday 0 00 00 Start Time Time on the day of the week of Condition in Prev Week or later End Time Up to the time on the day of the week of Condition in Current Week The maximum time between start and end is 7 days Start Time lt End Time Standard Print Custom Print Report Output Not split even the time spans over two weeks IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording IM 04L65B01 01EN When Condition Is Set to Every Month or When Report Type Is Set to Daily Monthly Below is the display example for Condition and Range when Condition is set to Every Month e Time span 2 months e Scale 10 day steps 1 day 11 days 21 days 1 days 11 days 21 days 1 day e Displayed using the previous month s color and current month s color light green and green from the start time to the end time Condition Every Month 3 00 Range Start Time Prev Month End Time Current Month 59 Condition time 1Day 11Day 21Day 1Day 11Day 21Day 1Day Start time End time Item Default Selectable Range Value Condition Every Every Month Every Month Month Day 1 to 31 1 day Hour 00 to 23 00 00 00 Minute 00 to 59 Range Standard Prev Prev Month and Start Time 0 00 00 on the 1st of Prev Month Print Month Current Month End Time
119. a Sets can be arranged vertically or horizontally on the page The following figure shows the layout when the Monitor Data Sets are arranged horizontally The number of vertical divisions is determined by the number of Monitor Data Sets in the horizontal direction and the total number of Monitor Data Sets on the entire Monitor Page When arranged vertically the horizontal and vertical arrangement of the Monitor Data Sets is swapped Vertical splitter The boundary of the divided areas can be moved left and right Horizontal splitter The boundary of the divided areas can be moved up and down The last row is divided equally when the page is divided into 15 monitors h Resize the Monitor Set When set to On you can make fine adjustments to the arrangement also on the Monitor Page i Alarm Shape You can set the shape of the alarm display area to circle O or rectangular LJ j Alarm Color You can change the color that appears when alarms are active On and when alarms are inactive Off Clicking a color displays a Color Setting dialog box where you can select the color 3 26 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 3 6 Setting the Data Recording Method GA10 saves the data collected at the collection interval to data files at a specific record interval The instantaneous values of data are recorded The collected data at each record interval is saved to files
120. a for the hour after the report creation time until the 24th hour is output For daily reports the data for the day after the report creation time until the end of the month is output Keyword ReportDataSum Hour R001 08 From the hourly data from 07 00 01 to 18 00 00 the report data sums of report channel R001 for 08 00 to 18 00 is output IM 04L51B01 01EN App 6 Appendix 1 Creating Report Templates Report Template Examples IM 04L51B01 01EN System Keyword Examples Intermixed Keyword and Text File header FileHeader Date and time DateTime l File header GX20 Date and time 2012 12 01 12 00 00 Intermixed Multiple Keyword and Text Device number Serial File Header FileHeader l Device number ABCDEFG File Header GX20 Report Data Keyword Examples The following examples are for when the hourly report data for report channel R001 is 101 102 103 104 and 105 and the hourly report data for report channel R002 is 201 202 203 204 205 and 206 The Repeat command applies to the closest keyword above the command in the same column ReportDatalnst Hour R001 Repeat Repeat Repeat ReportDatalnst Hour R002 Repeat Repeat Repeat Repeat The Repeat command applies to the keyword above it in the same column even when th
121. a recording file is displayed on the viewer When a recording file is displayed on the viewer the time information is displayed correctly according to the DST When the DST settings on the PC and device are the same the time information is displayed correctly If they are not the same the DST information of the device is not reflected correctly When device settings are changed during recording The changes are not reflected Recording stops Changes to devices during data collection and recording p Q11 on page 8 9 What is PC time or Device time P Q12 on page 8 9 LKA IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 3 Configuring Mail Settings GA10 can send email when alarms occur or when the communication status changes Configure email settings on the Mail Setting Page You can specify up to 20 sets of mail settings of your choice The Email Setting Page consists of an area for SMTP server settings and an area for detailed mail settings File Edit View P H 3 Al 44 SMTP Server Port No Resend Times Authentication Metho OFF Name Mail 01 On Off orF CO on e yefoid H er x D li G D di z Basic Operation 1 Select E Mail in the navigation area on the left of the window The Email Setting Page appears 2 Specify the following SMTP server settings e SMTP Serve
122. a value in the first data file that is created after recording to data files is started e Total Time of Recording The elapsed time since the start of recording The timer continues until all recordings stop or when Recording Standby is reached Number of Generated Files The number of data files that have been created after recording was started e Remaining Disk Capacity The free space on the disk that contains the data file save destination directory In the following conditions is displayed and the bar does not display the amount of space used e Not recording e The data file save destination folder is set to a network folder 4 11 UOI DIIJOD eJeg Bunoyuow Chapter 4 Monitoring Data Collection e Device Communication Status The status of communication with the devices in the Device List is displayed Nothing is displayed when data collection is stopped Model icon 001 px2000 e ____ Device name a Dx2000 R4 14e _ Model name 10 1 32 85 e _____ _ _ Communication address Normal e 4 Communication status Item Description Model icon Device icon Device name Device name and device number Model name Model name and release number or software name and release number Communication IP address address Communication Communication status between the server status and device Normal Error Retrying 4 8 Viewing Report Schedules RP opt
123. are assigned for each project using Details Settings mode For details see page 3 38 IM 04L65B01 01EN siasn BuiHeuew Chapter 6 Managing Users 6 2 Managing User Status 6 2 1 Using the User Management Page The administrator can view the status of other users on the User Management Page 1 Start the client and log in to the server with GA10 administrator privileges 2 On the View menu click User Management Page Or click the amp icon The User Management Page appears Fi View Project Operation User Help e Edit Hs 52 wh tw s J gt S a IA erai f e 3 Usert 3 User2 3 User3 3 User4 User Full Na AAAAA User Full Na BBBBB User Full Na CCCCC User Full Na DDDDD To Project Page __ 3 Check the user status by looking at the icons see below Not logged in Logged in Number of users logged in User Full Na AAAAA Appears in blue when logged in 6 2 6 3 Changing User Information This section explains how to change the user full name and password This procedure can also be performed by a user who is logged in 6 3 1 How the Administrator Changes Other User Information The administrator performs the following procedure to change the full name and initialize the password of a user 1 Follow steps 1 and 2 in section 6 2 to display the User Management Page 2 Select the user you want to change The user is selected The frame tur
124. are not displayed Wosirecentaldim Group name Alarm list Scroll bar E Data Logging Software admin Project1 To mery mirr User a a a ile iew Proje peration User Hel ind 2013 11 19 09 53 40 000 Tag 0002 L1 H Off m 3l 2013 1119 09 53 40 000 Tag 0002 L1 H Off a s 2013 11 19 09 53 23 000 Tag 0010 L3 H Off 8 gt drs ateopenan eimai Groun 01Group 02 pa Eo 09 z 13 000 Tag 0006 L2 H Off Ba nar a a z pple al amp Rasas a pope a st g j i amp 2013 11 19 09 43 57 000 Tag 0001 L2 L Off i i F 2013711719 09 41 40 000 Tag 0002 L2 L Off H i P 2013 1119 09 40 41 000 Tag 0004 L3 L Off i F 2013 11 19 09 39 13 000 Tag 0005 L1 L Off H FH 2013 11 19 09 39 11 000 Tag 0004 L4 L Off H F 2013711719 09 38 06 000 Tag 0002 L2 L On 4 i J 2013 11 19 09 37 47 000 Tag 0001 L2 L On P 20131119 09 36 52 000 Tag 0007 L3 L Off i 2013 11 19 09 36 37 000 Tag 0004 L4 L On P 2013 1119 09 34 32 000 Tag 0005 L1 L On j SH 2013 11 19 09 34 27 000 Tag 0009 L1 L Off j t yy Sa 32 54 000 Tag 0007 pee e Alarm Occurrence Display Alarm level Alarm occurrence is displayed in the alarm color in the Alarm type group display area i ym ae name ria i 2013 107225 13 20 27 000 Tag 0002 L1 H On 4 5 2 Tag Overview Q Click the Tag tab Alarm information is displayed for tags Alarm type icon in the display group Tags that do not have alarms set are Alarm status icon
125. arm level 1 alarm level 2 alarm level 3 and alarm level 4 e Alarm bars are displayed with tag display colors e The alarm bars of the active waveform area always shown in front If the alarm bars of multiple tags are overlapped and you want to view the alarm bars in the back make the appropriate waveform the active waveform IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 4 Monitoring Data Collection 4 2 6 Reading Values with Cursors You can use cursors to read values from waveforms You can display two cursors cursor A and cursor B e Showing and Hiding Cursors 1 Click a point in the waveform graph Cursor A vertical line appears and the value at the intersection of the cursor and waveform is displayed 2 Drag the cursor and release the mouse button Cursor B vertical line appears and the value at the intersection of the cursor and waveform is displayed 3 To clear the cursors on the View menu click Erase cursor If the cursor value displays of multiple tags are overlapped and you want to view the cursor values in the back make the appropriate waveform the active waveform Or use the cursor value dialog box When a cursor is displayed the waveform display enters playback mode and automatic updating of data display stops Cursor Cursor Q Data Logging Software admin Profectl File Edit View Project Operation User Help E s Gl wh amp amp Bp E Markt wefoud E E A 3382
126. arted Automatic D Local Syste Ch Base Filtering Engi The Base Fil Started Automatic Local Service i BitLocker Drive En BDESVC hos Manual Local Syste Sh Block Level Backu The WBENG Manual Local Syste C Bluetooth Support The Bluetoo Manual Local Service BranchCache This service Manual Network S S Certificate Propag Copies user Manual Local Syste S CNG Key Isolation The CNG ke Manual Local Syste Ci COM Event Syst Supports Sy Started Automatic Local Service COM System Ap Manages th Manual Local Syste 4 Computer Browser Maintains a Started Manual Local Syste _ m gt Extended Standard Scroll down to find DLGServer in the Name column Check the Status column The DLGServer status should be indicating Started and Startup Type should be set to Automatic Select an item to view its description Name Description Status Startup Type LogOnAs 4 C DCOM Server Pro The DCOM Started Automatic Local Syste Ci Desktop Window Provides De Started Automatic Local Syste DHCP Client Registers an Started Automatic Local Service C Diagnostic Policy The Diagno Started Automatic Local Service C Diagnostic Service The Diagno Started Manual Local Service C Diagnostic System The Diagno Manual Local Syste C Disk Defragmenter Provides Dis Manual Local Syste C Distri
127. arting Data Monitoring and Recording wccisscccaccccsescvearndnadsdantdadeeessenonsdecestanagseannieciaetaates 3 4 3 2 9 Gising a PTO 0 sereia Nee EE eE EEEE aTe oe nee a ere 3 5 Detailed Configuration Detail Settings ccccececccsssseeccesseeeceeeesecceasesecseaaseesseeseessseaes 3 6 3 3 1 Creating a Project in Detail Settings MOde cccccccssceccsseesseeeeeseaseseseeessauasseeeeeessanes 3 6 o e Registering Devices to Connect wece ds cccssnrcnccsievnerecnaieascnrentawhazncti mmnandednntiaweersosaeneeuewneses 3 9 3 3 3 SUNN Wet EAE E A E E A AE NE A EE E 3 15 3 3 4 SOWING Display GROUDS esensina aiai EE EAA iaadcesanatsdianeseusenseaesetsaeiansecaete 3 20 KES Registering Data Collection Method and Monitor Pag ccccccccceceeseeeeeeseeeeseeeees 3 23 3 3 6 Setting the Data Recording Method ccccccsccccceesesseeeeeceesseceeeseanaeseeeeessanasseeeeseaas 3 27 suo Configuring Mail SOUiINGS s c lt civecscctezeucsastedevecswads Pea pus cbbseskwaiectarisieaeaiwaseotedd ons sedstuvesswedeReds 3 31 3 3 8 Setting Project Access Privileges ccccccccsseseeeeeceeneseeeeeseeeeaseeeeessaeaaseeseessaneeseeeeses 3 38 IM 04L65B01 01EN 3 3 9 Holding the Lock State oc catsss wrroeh acacatctetiod ausiacdaeds dunes otal eacncord sees emaentersh 3 3 10 Using the DDE Server Feature cccccccsccesseeeecseesssseeeceenesseeeesseseasseeens 3 3 11 Starting Data Collection and Recording cc
128. as been added to the Start menu under All Programs Installing different versions e In case you already purchased a license for the old version but would like to try the new version for 60 days You can try the new version However install the new version in a PC different from the one you are running the old version on e In case you have tried the old version before and would now like to try the new version You can try the new version However install the new version in a PC different from the one that you tried R1 on e In case you already purchased a license for the old version and would like to upgrade to the new version You can upgrade for free Uninstall the old version enter your license and install the new version You can use it with the same specifications as the purchased old version ZOOO OTT The following table shows the product version compatibility Projects created in an earlier server version can be used in later server versions Server version to use the project R1 01 xx R1 02 xx R2 01 xx R2 02 xx Server version that created the project R1 01 xx Yes Yes Yes Yes R1 02 xx No Yes Yes Yes R2 01 xx No No Yes Yes R2 02 xx No No No Yes Yes Supported No Not supported CUA For details on adding option functions and clients see the following sections Adding Functions GA10UP RP MT UA or Adding a Client GA10CL For details on the trial period and entering license i
129. at keyword is not directly above the command ReportDatalnst Hour R001 Unit R001 Repeat Unit R001 Repeat Unit R001 You can mix system keywords report data keywords and text If the data specified by a keyword does not exist nothing is output ReportDatalnst Hour R001 Unit 107 CC ROO1 Repeat 102 Repeat 103 Repeat Unit ROO1 104 C Repeat C 105 C Repeat App 7 App xipueddy Appendix 1 Creating Report Templates Keywords in merged cells are affected by the leftmost cells above them ReportDatalnst Hour ROO1 ReportDatalnst Hour RO02 Repeat Repeat Repeat Repeat Repeat Repeat 101 201 102 202 Po 103 When a keyword is written incorrectly or its formatting is wrong the keyword will be output to the file as it is written ReportDatalnst Hour R ReportDatalnst Hour R ReportDatalnst Hour RO02 201 Repeat Repeat Repeat 202 Repeat 203 Repeat 204 ReportDatalnst Hour RO01 101 ReportDatalnst Hour RO02 ReportDatalnst Hour RO02 1 When there are multiple system keywords in the same cell only the first keyword is valid Creating Report Templates for PDF Report Files and Printer Output
130. ataNumber Record Interval Start Time File Size amp Data did 155 1 Second 2014 11 07 16 09 22 000 2014 11 07 16 11 56 000 136734 a Data 0001 did 39 1 Second 2014 11 07 16 12 18 000 2014 11 07 16 12 56 000 79894 Data 0002 did 2 1 Second 2014 11 07 16 24 16 000 2014 11 07 16 24 17 000 61764 Me Data 0003 dld 171 1 Second 2014 11 07 16 30 44 000 2014 11 07 16 33 34 000 144574 Data 0004 did 4 1 Second 2014 11 07 16 47 09 000 2014 11 07 16 47 12 000 62744 Data 0005 did 4930 1 Second 2014 11 07 17 01 19 000 2014 11 07 18 23 28 000 2476484 Data 0006 did 55 1 Second 2014 12 24 09 41 51 000 2014 12 24 09 42 45 000 41430 Data 0007 did 590 1 Second 2014 12 24 09 46 49 000 2014 12 24 09 56 38 000 150100 Data 0008 did 663 1 Second 2014 12 24 11 30 10 000 2014 12 24 11 41 12 000 163974 E9 Data 0009 did 170 1 Second 2014 12 24 16 07 49 000 2014 12 24 16 10 38 000 64388 T Data 0010 did 68 1 Second 2014 12 24 16 11 12 000 2014 12 24 16 12 19 000 43784 Data 0011 did 237 1 Second 2014 12 24 16 14 54 000 2014 12 24 16 18 50 000 77922 Data 0012 did 200 1 Second 2014 12 24 16 23 42 000 2014 12 24 16 27 01 000 70448 Data 0013 did 208 1 Second 2014 12 24 16 44 04 000 2014 12 24 16 47 31 000 72064 x Click this to switch the display Basic Operation 7 Click the Data files Page icon 5 The Data File List screen appears 2 Click the file a single file or several files that have been linked into one you want to print The selected line turns blue 3 Clic
131. ation User Help Ht oe mht hb start 20 a ies ElL Good Err Record Interval 1 Second 7 o Device 2 v Record File Type Binary O Excel O Binary amp Excel i s f E pS Tag v Start Condition Immediate lt 7 Stop Condition Continuous 7 Math Tag File Division None A Number of Files Limit the Number of Files Mm amp z Folder C Users Public Documents SMARTDAC Data Logging Software Data project a CReferto TE Record a lt File Name Data C Attach the Date C Attach the Time Comment 4 Ea Dq E mail No Title String 5 re 1 5 Access amp Others 3 amp 4 5 x 6 7 i 8 ti Mo WCC Differences in Data Recording When PC Time Is Used and When Device Time Is Used The table below summarizes the differences in the recording files created when Data time is set to Device time and when set to PC time files Data Time Specified Data Time Influence PC Time Device Time Number of recording _ One data file is created A data file is created for each device Or if there are multiple acquisition intervals in the same device a data file is created for each interval Alarm information Alarm information is recorded by taking the logical OR of the alarm information from the collected data immediately after the previous recording data point to the current recording data point The data files and alarm information are aligned DST daylight saving time when
132. ator Tag color Tag name Measured value Unit Measurement bar display e Tag Display Area Tag alarm status is indicated in the alarm color The alarm colors specified on the Acquisition amp Monitor page e Alarm Indicator The status of alarm level 1 alarm level 2 alarm level 3 and alarm level 4 are displayed from the top Tag alarm status is indicated in the alarm color Alarm indicators show a character that indicates the alarm type It is not shown if the display area is limited Characters that indicate alarm types gt section 4 5 3 4 3 2 Showing and Hiding Alarm Indicators When you click Alarm on the View menu to add a check mark alarm indicators are shown To not show alarm indicators click Alarm on the View menu to unselect the command IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 4 Monitoring Data Collection 4 4 Monitoring on the Meter Display 4 4 1 Displayed Content There are bar meters and analog meters Tag color Tag name Measured value Bar meter Bar meter een Unit Alarm zone and alarm value mark Alarm indicator Tag color Tag name Analog meter Analog meter 2 AC mes Alarm zone and unit Alarm indicator e Tag Display Area Tag alarm status is indicated in the alarm color e Alarm Zone The zone where alarms occur is indicated in the alarm color e Alarm Value Mark bar meters only Indicates the alarm value of data collection devices This appears
133. aving jurisdiction for judgment to be entered on the award and or for enforcement of the award 12 Miscellaneous 12 1 This Agreement supersedes all prior oral and written understandings representations and discussions between the parties concerning the subject matter hereof to the extent such understandings representations and discussions should be discrepant or inconsistent with this Agreement 12 2 If any part of this Agreement is found void or unenforceable it shall not affect the validity of the balance of the Agreement which shall remain valid and enforceable according to its terms and conditions The parties hereby agree to attempt to substitute for such invalid or unenforceable provision a valid or enforceable provision that achieves to the greatest extent possible the economic legal and commercial objectives of the invalid or unenforceable provision 12 3 Failure by either party to insist on performance of this Agreement or to exercise a right when entitled does not prevent such party from doing so at a later time either in relation to that default or any subsequent one End of document IM 04L65B01 01EN Using Open Source Software Expat Heimdal The report generation section and print section in the Report Print function of the following products use Expat source code In accordance with the Expat license copyright distribution terms and license are provided below SMARTDAC Data Logging Software GA10 or GA10CL Copyrig
134. buted Link Tr Maintains li Started Automatic Local Syste Si Distributed Transa Coordinates Manual Network S SMARTDAC rted Network S GE DNS Client The DNS Cli Started Network S Ci Encrypting File Sy Provides th Manual Local Syste Ci Extensible Authen The Extensi Manual Local Syste Oh Fax Enables you Manual Network S CE FLEXnet Licensing This service Manual Local Syste C Function Discover The FDPHO Manual Local Service e Function Discover Publishes th Started Automatic Local Service Google Software Google P Manual Local Syste Google Update Google Y Started Automatic D Local Syste e Google Update Google Y Manual Local Syste m Status Started Startup Type Automatic DLGServer If the DLGServer status indicates Started the GA10 server is running 3 After confirmation close the window Me WHC If Startup Type is set to Automatic the server will start and stop when Windows start and stop LLL ddd sddssidddddcccddadddddcdcadddddddaddaddddddaaddddddde Starting Restarting or Stopping the Server 1 On the Start menu click Control Panel and Administrative Tools and double click Services The Services window appears C Services oo File Action View Help es 0 ss Em gt gt aup i Services Local Select an item to view its description Name Descripti
135. ccscssssseeeeceeessseeeeseeesseees 3 4 Registering Modbus Devices iicisssicacecinisonidediandnaaeieeetinicantdinwhinnstantlabdstiailaainniens 3 4 1 Registration of Modbus DeVICES ccssececceceeeseeeeeceasseeeeeseaneaeeeeeessanes 3 4 2 What Is a Modbus Device Definition File ccccccececseesseeseseeeeeeeeeeeees 3 4 3 Modbus Device Definition File Example cccccceccceceeseceseeseeeeseeeeeeseaes 3 5 Using the Math Function MT Option cccccccsseceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaseeseeseaees 3 9 1 Seiling Math TAGS sncensnenensnsapnetnancensnsrsneconseeectuatsncmesntehcecmatenorsancenaapaeenacenoedass 3 9 2 Performing COMPUTAUIONS cincsnsasxorsnesanccxceensansadanenonnenneneckonatnnesenecberansannons ends 3 0 0 RESCUING COMPULAUON ciceczccccvescanctnciazedsensnecnessdanisdeineasenbuetadecsaxeeecdedeianetieees 3 6 Configuring Auto Print RP option ssctucsscsatednsncstnnsiadestaenttandestaenatanennedistadeoecdeears 3 6 1 Print Types and Basic Operation ccccccccseececcceesceeeseeceeesueeeeesseeeeeesanes 3 6 2 Registering Template Files isi iaiacianvaniennetso icine nientadonbesetamaituntaniebabiamnsianianail 3 6 4 On E eee en nee ee eee ene ee re eee eee 3 6 5 Ropo OU sas ee anit NR AEE oa r S EEE ESRR 3 6 6 Schedule Conditions and Range scc lt cicsccccisccscscccssxeescacedadsoeatacsiansiecedessabersans Chapter 4 Monitoring Data Collection 4 1 Monitoring on the Monitor Page se vacssiiess
136. ccsssececseeseecceeesceceseeseeessaeseeessaaees 4 13 4 9 1 Controlling Device Computation from GA10 cccccssssseeeeceeeseseeeeseaeeeeeeessanaeseeeeeseas 4 13 4 10 Things US ONS OS asses eee ntersin ses ns sc apni tctecenesecainsasecoseateceedenetecacnanse SEAE RISES Aende isasi 4 14 4 10 1 Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time ccccccsseeecececeeeeseeeeeceeneseeeesseeaseeeeesensagees 4 14 A NO TERNOE DD Ale E E A AAE ET E EE A AENT 4 14 4 10 3 Reflecting Changes Made on the Monitor Page to the Setting Page eeee 4 14 4 10 4 Changing the Time on the Device after Starting Data Collection and Recording 4 14 4 11 WISIN MING LOO e E E a a a a R 4 15 4 11 1 Displayed Content in the Log Dialog BOX ccccccccccsessseeeeeceeneseeeeeseaaesseeeeeessanaaees 4 15 4 11 2 Opening t e Log Dialog BOK acts assendeccaciseneeend ars wadacdnceaensecand ai ran aa ianiai ree iaaa 4 15 Chapter 5 Managing Recording Data 5 1 Displaying a List of Data File S ec cccccseecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeessaeeeeeeaaeeeeesaeeey 5 1 5 1 1 Displayed ONS ON ieee coetnncancenceensaneoespessncenartnatuenenaeosruspantnacecmedaatencatustesanaorcnnsenemnereseseersvess 5 1 52 Displaying Recording Data iece carecrecannareset ast iucsnisaciednrastannadousaniuiederausante cisnaumssacudearsudancatnnavenac 5 2 5 3 Printing Recorded Data Manually RP Option cccccccsseceecceseeeecesseecceseeeessesseee
137. ce and of the same collection interval as the monitor set subwindow that you added a mark to In monitor mode a mark is added to all groups e When Marks Are Overlapped Sometimes marks overlap and the string of the lower mark cannot be read Clicking a mark with Shift held down moves the mark to the back Me WEE e Marks that have been added cannot be deleted or edited e Mark information is saved in data files Only binary data files Mark information added to data positions in files that have already been closed is saved in the data file that is currently being recorded You can view these marks by displaying connected data files e The maximum number of marks that can be added from the start to the end of monitoring is 10 000 e The maximum number of marks that the expression s mark function MT option can add to a data point at the same time position is 200 e The data range that can be referenced in playback mode is up to 3600 points from the most recent acquired data However if recording is in progress and the recording interval is the same as the data acquisition interval data can be referenced up to the start point of recording exceeding the 3600 point limitation VL sb srcssdddccccccccccccdcccccccadddddddddddddddddddiie IM 04L65B01 01EN 4 3 Monitoring on the Digital Display 4 3 1 Displayed Content Group 01 Group 02 Group 03 Group H Tag 0001 Tag display area ep a a MTT Alarm indic
138. cimal point format vary depending on the language Display format of each language Language vs Date Format and Decimal Point Format on page 3 64 IM 04L65B01 01EN 5 7 e eq Buipiooey BuiBeuen A Chapter 5 Managing Recording Data Report channel Set the channel to output in reports M8 WY The device s LOG input channel is not output If a tag corresponding to the device s LOG input channel is specified the report channel value will be blank and the status will be error VW ddiddddddddddddcdddddaadddddddaadddaddaadddddddadddddaaadddddadaddddddddddddaddadddddddadddddddaadddddadadddaaddaddd a d a b c Sum eeen Report Channel Settings Symbol Item Name Default Range Description Value a No R001 to 001 to 100 fixed Report channel number Click a No R100 cell to select the row b Tag Index Tag0001 Tag range including math tags Select the tag Click the tag to display to of the project the Tag Index dialog box Then click Tag0100 the tag you want to specify c Sum scale Off Off sec min hour day Displays the sum scale of the report channel d Auto increment None R001 to R100 Assigns tag indexes in ascending button order from the first tag in the selected range e All On button None R001 to R100 Clicking the button collectively turns on the sum scales in the selected range To select a tag click a tag button under Tag Index and select the tag from the displayed dialog
139. communication function code Address JM o A 1 465535 Modbus register CCSCidC DataType enum INT16 UNIT16 INT32_B INT32_L Read data type UINT32_B UINT32_L FLOAT_B FLOAT L3 DecimalPos_ it Oto5 JO Channel decimal place Cd Min double ___ 1E16 to 1E6146 O Minimum channelspan _ __ Max double 1E16to 1616 J100 Maximum channelspan_ __ ScaleRatio _ double f tEtsto lei ft ehanne scaling coefficient ScaleOffset4 _ double 1E16 to 1E6146 O Channel scaling offset Unit sing string Up to 6 Unicode characters Channel unit Cd an jare oc oa 15 characters Min characters Max Maski im2 Hexadecimal number 0 to 65535 _ Data bit mask Ses i Alphanumeric characters up to ee Value conversion table name 15 characters Unit DataError 5 ADError 5 PlusOver 5 MinusOver 5 Burnout Type 5 6 Burnout Value Alarm Type Alarm Value Alarm Type Kind enum OFF H L dH dL RH RL OFF Default alarm type tH tL PVH PVL DVH DVL 7 DVO DVI OPH SPL OTH OTL ETC maosadi maa ao E nale characters Alarm SetValue Value doube 1E16 to 1E16 io Initial value of the alarm set value Int String nt O Table Ramee i Alphanumeric characters 1 to 15 Value conversion table name characters Eom pe enm Ss nt String Target conversion data type ae a ee 2147
140. cording 1 line 1 tag 1 channel Click the check boxes in the Monitor or Record column To select consecutive boxes click the first cell and then click the last cell while holding down the SHIFT key 3 Set the tags Clicking a cell in a column other than Collect or Record displays a list box or a win dow containing options Select the desired setting For the Tag No and Tag Com ment cells type text strings Select the device for the assigned channel Select the data type Select the channel to assign Select the number of decimal places Select the tags to use Type the tag number and comment string m0001 L 001 Device cs m0002 C 001 Device w 4 w C 001 Device SHORT 4 L 001 Device SHORT 4 i C 0014 Device SHORT 4 C 001 Device SHORT 4 w O 001 Device SHORT 4 2 C 001 Device SHORT 4 CL 0014 Device SHORT 4 001 Device SHORT 4 002 Device SHORT 1 7 002 Device SHORT 3 1 m SHORT 4 x SHORT 2 amp SHORT 4 Tag selection state Click again to switch IM 04L65B01 01EN 3 15 Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 16 Tag settings are used to set display groups and other settings in a project Therefore even if you change the device channel assigned to a tag there is no need to change display group settings or other settings that use tags __
141. ctors employees and agents harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever including any court costs and attorney s fees arising out of or related to the said use 4 Limited Warranty 4 1 The Software Product shall be provided to you on an as is basis at the time of delivery and except for physical damage to the recording medium containing the Software Product Yokogawa and Supplier shall disclaim all of the warranties whatsoever express or implied and all liabilities therefrom If any physical defect is found on the recording medium not later than twelve 12 months from delivery Yokogawa shall replace such defective medium free of charge provided that the defective medium shall be returned to the service office designated by Yokogawa at your expense within the said twelve 12 months THIS LIMITED WARRANTY PROVIDED IN THIS CLAUSE IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER AND YOKOGAWA HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES RELATING TO THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE NON INFRINGEMENT QUALITY FUNCTIONALITY APPROPRIATENESS ACCURACY RELIABILITY AND RECENCY IN NO EVENT SHALL YOKOGAWA WARRANT THAT THERE IS NO INCONSISTENCY OR INTERFERENCE BETWEEN THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND OTHER SOFTWARE NOR SHALL BE LIABLE THEREFOR The warranty provisions of the applicable law are expressly excluded to the extent permitt
142. dcccccccdddddddddccaddaadaadaddddddddddddddadadaddde e Automatic Assignment Procedure 1 On the Project menu click Assign Tag Automatically An Assign Automatically dialog box appears 2 Select the assignment method Assign Automatically Assign According to Tag Number Assign According to Device l OK Cancel To assign according to device do not change 3 To assign according to tag numbers select Assign According to Tag Number and type the number of tags to share in each group Assign Automatically x Assign According to Tag Number Tag Number of Each Grou lt 50 I Assign According to Device OK Cancel 4 Click oK All display group settings are initialized and tags are assigned to display groups on the Display Group Setting Page IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording Basic Operation IM 04L65B01 01EN 3 3 5 Registering Data Collection Method and Monitor Page After setting the display groups register the data collection method and monitor page Data collection is performed for tags that are set to collect data on the Tag Setting Page On the Acquisition amp Monitor Page set the data collection conditions namely the type of timestamps to attach to data and data collection interval In addition specify the number of windows to divide the Monitor Page into and their layout
143. dddcddddddcdcddddede Entering a License Number after the Trial Period If the trial period expires you will no longer be able to log in When you start the software you will be prompted to enter the license number If you have purchased a license type the number Adding Functions GA10UP RP MT UA To add an option in the Input Server License dialog box register the upgrade license number Model Name GA10UP Rp Report Print function MT Math function UA OPC UA server function 1 Right click Data Logging Software in the Start menu 2 On the shortcut menu click Run as administrator Data Logging Software starts 3 Log in 4 On the Help menu click Input Server License A dialog box appears Input Server License Please input software s license numbers C N item License Content License 400 0000 99856 MS86 License 100 Close 5 Type the license number and click Register A message is displayed Option is added to server Please restart server to enable option M1013 Qx IM 04L65B01 01EN 6 Click OK The description of options is displayed on the sec ond and subsequent lines under license items Input Server License Please input software s license numbers L J L__J L__J Item License Content License 400 0000 99856 MS86 License 100 License Upgrade 401 0040 99856 4MBK Math l Close Click Close Restarting the server P Sec 2
144. de Message Description and Solution E3032 Failed to open data files Update the information on the Data files Page and check that the relevant data file exists E3033 Fail to launch web browser A Web browser may not be installed E3034 Sei taled Decauge ereis ne NJN Acos Ask the project owner to grant project access privileges Operation failed because the target user does not The user may already have been deleted Update the information on E3035 i exist the User Management Page and check whether the user exists E3036 ralk tO Import project oecause regIsIErEd HEVICES TERGN Delete unneeded devices from the Registered Devices List the maximum number E3037 Project is closed because Project lock status is To use the project open it again released forcibly Operation failed because the project is locked by E3038 Use the project after the project is unlocked another user E3039 Specified new owner does not exist you can not The user may already have been deleted Set the new owner to an change the owner existing user re The project may already have been deleted Update the information on E3040 Operation failed because Project is deleted ihe Proiect et age and chee thal the proiect eodsis E3041 Serial no is invalid Activation failed Check the license number and enter it correctly Server has not been activated Adding option to E3042 software failed Register the server license first and then add options Adding
145. display groups There are two methods for automatic assignment e Assign According to Tag Number When you specify the number of tags to assign to each display group the specified number of tags are assigned in order from the first number of display group 1 on the Tag Setting Page For example if the total number of tags is 50 and you set the number of tags to 10 10 tags will be assigned to each group from Group 1 to 5 If the Math function MT is installed math tags will be assigned in order after tags are assigned e Assign According to Device The tags of a single device are assigned to each display group For each device device number that a tag has been assigned to assign the tag to a display group Tags are assigned in ascending order by device number starting with display group 1 Within a display group tags are assigned in ascending order by tag number If the number of tags of a device is greater than the number of waveforms in a display group multiple display groups will be used for the device 3 22 Mo WCC e When you assign tags automatically the settings of all display groups are reset to their default conditions After automatic assignment you must configure the settings again e Tags that are automatically assigned are those whose Monitor item is selected on the Tag Setting Page and whose channel is specified e Math tags are assigned automatically using Assign According to Tag Number Vv ddd dd
146. e Click again to stop only the recording Under recording i Click the hs icon to start data collection Click again to stop Likewise click the a icon on the right to start recording A UNSa Click again to stop only the recording To also stop data monitoring click Ma To return to the Setting Page click z l Recorded data files are listed when you click 5 Data files Page P 5 1 Displaying a List of Data Files on page 5 1 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 2 5 Closing a Project To close a project click the X icon on the right edge of the page e Note that clicking the close button in the upper right of the window closes the software File Edit View Project Operation User Help 350 ebb Bi i2 3 gt aa 00 s R veran series mtomaton Search 004 02 003 0s SQ comm kind E Ethernet Serial Ca Click to start record gt tee Acknowledge 005 006 007 pos E Hide next time Close the project Monitor Record Interval 1 Second E Folder CAUsers PubliciDocuments SMARTDAC Data Logging Software Data Project A1 Refer to When you close a project the Project List Page appears When data collection and recording are stopped and the project is closed When the project is closed wi
147. e Custom Report button at the top of the Data File List screen to manually perform printing that is equivalent to the Report Output of scheduled auto printing Basic Operation 7 Click the Data files Page icon 5 The Data File List screen appears 2 Click the file a single file or several files that have been linked into one you want to print The selected line turns blue 3 Click Custom Report A Custom Report dialog box appears i Custom Report Data File Data did Type Hourly Daily w Condition Everyda Template File Server Refer to O Local C Refe File Name Output Folder Data Folder C Users Public Documents SMARTDAC Data Logging Software Data pr Ouput Printer No O Yes Output Language Japanese amp Report channel j Tag Index r t t Graph 1 Graph 2 Graph 3 Graph 4 Print Type None C j Cancel 4 Select the report type from the list Type Hourly Daily x GONNER Daily Weekly Template File Daily Monthly Batch Daily custom e eqgq HBulpsooay Huibeuew Chapter 5 Managing Recording Data 5 Set the condition 6 If you set the report type to Batch or Daily custom select the save interval Type Daily custom w Condition terva v Base Time 00 00 00 Save interval 10min 4hours Template File Server SIMS C Refert
148. e actual data type Related topic B gt Q11 LA ZOOO O QQQT If the data collection channel is LOG input set the data type to LOG If set to LOG the decimal place setting is void If the data type is set to BOOL the decimal place setting is void xxx hhh bbb bbbdsdddddcddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddaadddaaddaddda IM 04L65B01 01EN 3 17 Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recordin Collectively Editing Tags To collectively edit setup data you must select the target setup data and then click a button on the action bar which is at the bottom of the window The result varies depending on the type of icon you click on the action bar see the following table Switches the check box state between selected and unselected If all the data values in the selected range are the same clicking this icon will switch all of them in the same way If the data values in the selected range are not all the same clicking this icon will switch all of them to match the first data value in the selected range pee increasing channel numbers starting with the first tag in the selected range Copies the settings of the first tag in the selected range to the other tags in the selected range Copy flag Switches between selected and unselected states for items to be pasted when copying setup data The items are normally selected l pasted Clicking this button causes the corresponding item to beco
149. e assigned to a tag Only the trip line of the active waveform is displayed Moving the trip line Drag the value of the trip line to the desired position Y axis Displays the Y axis scale title and unit Each y axis is displayed according to its corresponding tag color Legend Displays tags tag colors waveform display on off check boxes and Y axis display on off check boxes Alarm Display Displays alarms using bars from occurrence to release Time Axis The right end shows the most recent data time IM 04L65B01 01EN e Vertical Splitter Use the vertical splitter to adjust the width of the Y axis display area When you move the pointer over the vertical splitter the pointer changes to lt gt In this condition drag the pointer to expand or reduce the width of the Y axis display area Waveform Display e Active Waveform The front most displayed waveform is called the active waveform e Changing the Active Waveform Click a tag in the Legend or a Y axis to make the corresponding waveform the active waveform When a Y axis is shared among multiple waveforms the waveform with the smallest waveform number will become the active waveform The active waveform mark a moves below the Y axis of the active waveform e Automatically Updating the Displayed Data monitor mode When the time axis scroll bar is at the right end or when it is not displayed the data display is automatically updated This mode is called m
150. e eee ae 3 31 gt Q D x Index Software License Agreement cccccssssssecccsessseeeeeeseseseeeeesees il Specific Privilege Levell cccccssccccccsssseeeeeceeesseeeeeseaaeeseees 6 4 Standard MIN cersetor riinan inn kE NAAR 3 57 Start Stiop Recording Simultaneously ccceeeeeeeeeeeees 3 42 Start Stop Monitoring Simultaneously cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 42 Status Page senssa e i cl ten enie eis 4 11 RI E E EE EEE E E E E 4 2 p Tag Seting Page e scsisceisnessi iae naidiian eai nienia 3 15 template ecici eierniie earan anioi i iaaa ioi 3 57 iaa PP E A EE A E AEE T AT A A T il Trend IDES GIAY esintisi or a EAEE ai 4 3 U Universal VIC WE icdecsune sta rstacecataisnessanecatedinedsecanancaseneceeubinsasasen 5 2 DPIC GK SPOS CES erener nenn an EEEE EN EEEa 6 5 SPAS Ta serrie rE E EE EA 3 19 Updating the Software i crest npc adivediocdoredneenance siaueeusaaacensedeset arian axlaes i Aas e 8e PEE E T TE T A E A E A 2 9 upgrade cense cj cinicvts ccnseenes deausdrsanecnetnimesceduaeedommeuvneeiant 1 5 2 9 User Display FOM ccsasctcatiaractnnnesscomsnctatuatnoneinivicreduiantwinaniad 3 39 user IMPOR MAU ON aissis isniraisinnicdnsrnc inanin E rara A EErEE ENNEN 6 2 User Manageme nt ccccsccccsseccssseccensecceeeessuseeseaseeses 2 4 6 2 User Management Page ccccssssecessessecessesecesseseeeessesees 6 4 DO SS PTE A T A A E R AAE A TE 6 1 W Wep applicato esos scores este c
151. e keyword will not be converted and will remain as is Report Kind Start date and time End date and time Start number End number Hour Start time hour End time hour Day Start day End day Week Month Batch Relative start time minute Relative end time minute Start number End number Custom Start time hour minute End time hour minute Free App 2 IM 04L51B01 01EN Appendix 1 Creating Report Templates IM 04L51B01 01EN Keyword Definitions For examples and details see Report Template Examples e System Keywords Keyword Meaning Display Format Time Current time on the device Time Date Current date on the device Date DateTime Current date and time on the device DateTimeString Current date and time on the device Character string Serial Serial number of the device Equip Tag Tag string of the device Equip TagNo Tag number of the device FileHeader File header of the device Ch Channel number Tag Tag string Chid Tag number Unit Unit FileName File name Model Model MeasCh Number of measurement channels Number MathCh Number of math channels Number Samplelnterval Sample interval Character string Commenttritle File comment title Range 1 to 8 CommentDetail File comment details Range 1 to 8 PrintGroup Print group PrintRange Print range Range G1 to G4 1 2 3 4 The parameter is the r
152. e password using 4 to 30 alphanumeric characters LLA The default values of the settings in the Change User s Information dialog box are shown below Item Initial value Full Name User full name before change Password Nothing is displayed New Password Nothing is displayed Confirm New Password Nothing is displayed IM 04L65B01 01EN 6 4 Registering and Deleting Users Only the administrator can register and delete other users 6 4 1 Registering a New Users 1 2 4 Start the client and log in with the administrator account that you created earlier On the View menu click User Management Page Or click the amp icon The User Management Page appears On the User menu click Register New User Data File Edit View Project Operation User Help H 5 see a JTF i ee E ood Cs The Change User s Information dialog box appears Type the user name and user full name that you want to register Enter a name that is easy for the administrator to identify Registe User x User Name User User Full Name BBBB_fullname OK Cancel 5 Check the entered information and click OK The user is registered and an icon is added in the 6 window 2 Useri User Full Na BBBE In the case of an administrator on the File menu click Logout to log out A registered user can log in without a password Follow the instructions in 6 3 2 How Users Change
153. e third parameter has been omitted ReportDataSum Hour R001 01 or The fourth parameter has been omitted ReportDataSum Hour R001 01 IM 04L51B01 01EN App 1 Appendix 1 Creating Report Templates Excel Format Rules e Set the data format by setting the cell format e Set the proper format for each keyword s cell in the cell s Number properties e The keyword in a cell is only valid when the keyword name and parameters are all in the same format When a keyword s font size or some other property is not consistent it is invalid ReportDataSum Hour R001 00 23 The font size of Hour is different so the keyword is invalid e Ifa single cell contains text and a keyword only the format of the keyword has to be consistent The format of the text can be different Date and time DateTime The format of the keyword is consistent so it is valid Limitations on Report Types and Template Types If you violate the rules illustrated below data will not be output Keyword Template Type Parameter Report Kind Hour Day Week Month Hour Day Day Day Batch Day Week Month Custom Hour v v Day y v y v Week y v Month v v Batch v Custom v Free v v Limitation on Report Types and Parameter Omissions If you violate the rules illustrated below it will be considered a keyword format error Th
154. ec O sec TrendGraph Start Time Prev Day Loo Loo Coo End Time Current Day Loo Loo Range T aS Se 0 00 6 00 12 00 18 00 0 00 6 00 12 00 Group 01 w Line Thick 1 0pt Tag Display Form Y Axis Column Num Enter the name of the schedule The default value and input range are the same as those for Standard Print 2 Task Select Report Output 3 Type Select the report type Condition explained next varies depending on the selected report type See the table below e Default value Hourly Daily Relationship between Report Type and Condition Report Type Condition Hourly Daily Fixed to Everyday hh mm can be set Daily Weekly Fixed to Every Week The day of week and hh mm can be set Daily Monthly Fixed to Every Month The day and hh mm can be set Batch Condition is not displayed Daily custom Fixed to Interval The hour and base time hh mm can be set IM 04L65B01 01EN 3 67 Bulpiooay pue UO DAIJOD ejyeg BHulzieyg pue Hulinbiyuoy Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 4 Condition From the list select the time to execute printing e Default value Everyday The range 11 will vary depending on this condition Schedule Conditions and Range Save Interval Hidden on the initial page because the report type is Hourly Daily This appears only w
155. ed 4 2 Atthe sole discretion of Yokogawa Yokogawa may upgrade the Software Product to the new version number Upgrade and make it available to you at your expense or free of charge as Yokogawa deems fit In no event shall Yokogawa be obliged to upgrade the Software Product or make the Upgrade available to you 4 3 Certain maintenance service may be available for some types of Software Product at Yokogawa s current list price Scope and terms and conditions of the maintenance service shall be subject to those separately provided by Yokogawa Unless otherwise provided in Yokogawa catalogues or General Specifications maintenance services will be available only for the latest version and the immediately preceding version In no event will service for the immediately preceding version be available for more than 5 years after the latest version has been released In addition no service will be provided by Yokogawa for the Software Product which has been discontinued for more than 5 years Notwithstanding the foregoing maintenance service may not be available for non standard Software Product Further in no event shall Yokogawa provide any service for the Software Product which has been modified or changed by any person other than Yokogawa 5 Infringement 5 1 If you are warned or receive a claim by a third party that the Software Product in its original form infringes any third party s patent which is issued at the time of delivery of the Software
156. efinition file root element Option list node Option information Register list node Register information Channel list node Channel information Channel default setting Default decimal place Default minimum span Default maximum span Default unit Channel value Error data status A D converter status OVER status OVER status Burnout information Burnout type Burnout status Alarm list node Alarm information Alarm type Alarm value Alarm set value Value conversion table node Value conversion table Conversion value Quantit 1 Oor 1 Oto5 1 1 to 300 1 1 to 300 Oor 1 Oor 1 Oor 1 Oor 1 Oor 1 1 Oor 1 Oor 1 Oor 1 Oor 1 Oor 1 Oor 1 Oor 1 Oor 1 0 to 4 Oor 1 Oor 1 Oor 1 Oor 1 0 to 100 0 to 100 IM 04L65B01 01EN 3 43 Bulpiooay pue UO DAIJOD ejyeg Hulyieyg pue Hulsnbyuoy Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recordin Node Attributes of Modbus Device Definition Files If an attribute is not specified the default value will be applied However if the Option Mask or Trans attribute is not specified GA10 assumes that the corresponding function is not used and does not apply the default value oe ae To ee a Value characters Note Match this with the XML file name PortNo Jite O O 1 to 65535 Ethernet port number of the Modbus device aie A OS ca a a Unit msec oe e Se ee characters device characters FunctionCode int Borg 3 or 4 LC Modbus
157. eges to control the project such as Owner Manager or Operator e The project is locked If an owner manager or operator user is logged in the project is locked Other users can only monitor the project Wait until the other user using the project closes it e The project is locked If data collection is in progress and the project s Keep Lock State is set to ON the project remains locked even when an owner manager or operator closes the project To control the project perform either of the following procedures e Ask the user who locked the project to unlock the project e Clear the Keep Lock state forgot the user password What do I do A8 If the administrator password is lost there is no recovery method Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer If a user password is lost the administrator can initialize the password Then the user can log in with the initialized password blank and set a new password The device data and the data collected and recorded by GA10 are not synchronized Why A9 Data collected using Device time is recorded as is by the software In this situation the device data and the collected and recorded data are synchronized However data collected using PC time are timestamped with the PC time and the values are adjusted accordingly In this situation the device data and the collected and recorded data based on PC time may not be synchronized Can the recorded data be printed A10 Data file
158. el template file xlsx xlsm If no template files are registered only None is displayed M8 WCC e You can create template files tpl using SMARTDAC Report Template Builder You can download it from the YOKOGAWA website for free e Ifthe template file is set to None report output is not possible iii dddigdddddcccdddddddddddddaaddddddaadddddddadaddddddadddddddadaddddddddddddddaddddddddddaddddddaddddddddddddddddadddda 8 Print Out Displays a list of printers registered in the server This item is valid for a template file tpl It does not appear for an Excel template file When using an Excel template file you cannot print directly from GA10 3 68 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 9 Output Language Specify the language for the printed materials The date format and decimal point format vary depending on the language See Language vs Date Format and Decimal Point Format provided earlier 10 Report channel Set the channel to output in reports AUZO O O O O O T The device s LOG input channel is not output If a tag corresponding to the device s LOG input channel is specified the report channel value will be blank and the status will be error CLA a b c Tag Index Sum scale i O sec O Imin hour O sec O Imin O ihour O sec O Imin ihour Report Channel Settings Symbol Item Name Default Range Description Value a No R0
159. elect a folder that the server Network service account can write to Note that files cannot be saved to the desktop or Document folders If you select an area where writing is not possible an error message E3055 will appear LLL ddd ssdddddccdaddddddaddadddddadadadddddadaaddddddde 8 File Name Specify the name of the data file When recording data using Specified Period it is convenient to add the date or time to the file name The date or time of the first data point is added to the file name 9 Comment You can attach comments to data files You can view these comments when you display the data in Universal Viewer You can change the comments until you click Start Recording but not afterwards 10 Math Action Appears only when the MT option is in use On GA10 with the Math function MT option the Math Action item appears on the Record Setting Page To reset math when recording starts select the check box However the math reset timing is delayed by one recording interval from the record start timing Also depending on your PC environment it could be delayed by more than two record intervals 3 30 Record Setting Page When the Math Function MT option Is in Use C Reset Math When Recording Starts Ges Q Data Logging Software admin project_a lala BS File Edit View Project Oper
160. enacchadeonsaenspeccrarenectesaatwosueceacencisesde 3 13 Index 2 IM 04L51B01 01EN
161. ense 8 Audit Withholding 8 1 Yokogawa shall have the right to access and audit your facilities and any of your records including data stored on computers in relation to the use of the Software Product as may be reasonably necessary in Yokogawa s opinion to verify that the requirements of this Agreement are being met 8 2 Even after license being granted under this Agreement should there be any change in circumstances or environment of use which was not foreseen at the time of delivery and in Yokogawa s reasonable opinion is not appropriate for using the Software Product or if Yokogawa otherwise reasonably believes it is too inappropriate for you to continue using the Software Product Yokogawa may suspend or withhold the license provided hereunder 9 Assignment If you transfer or assign the Software Product to a third party you shall expressly present this Agreement to the assignee to ensure that the assignee comply with this Agreement transfer all copies and whole part of the Software Product to the assignee and shall delete any and all copy of the Software Product in your possession irretrievably This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and shall be binding on the assignees and successors of the parties 10 Termination Yokogawa shall have the right to terminate this Agreement with immediate effect upon notice to you if you breach any of the terms and conditions hereof Upon termination of this Agreement you shall promptly cease u
162. eport channel number it cannot be omitted The parameter is the comment number it cannot be omitted The parameter is the graph number it cannot be omitted Excel templates can show down to seconds The item becomes a character string in PDF and printer output e Report Data Keywords These keywords cannot be used for the Custom Print Keyword Meaning Display Format ReportDataDate Report creation date Date ReportDataTime Report creation time Time gt ReportDataDate Time Report creation date and time Date xe ReportDataDateTimeString Report creation date and time Character string g ReportDataElapsedTimeString Report data time out date and time A ReportDataStatus Report data status X lt ReportDataSum Report data sum Number or character ReportDatalnst Instantaneous report data value string ReportDataAve Average report data value ReportDataMax Maximum report data value ReportDataMin Minimum report data value 1 Write the parameters in this order report type cannot be omitted report start date and time can be omitted report end date time can be omitted start number can be omitted and end number can be omitted Write the parameters in this order report type cannot be omitted report channel number cannot be omitted report start date and time can be omitted report end date and time can be omitted start number can be omitted a
163. er right 4 2 7 Adding Marks You can add marks to data To add a mark specify the mark string and the data to add the mark to 1 ESK Type the string in the mark edit box You can edit the displayed string as well as select from a list of strings that you used in the past from the drop down menu The drop down menu displays the most recent five strings Mark edit box Current group All groups in Tn fa in D E Mera JS a Click the data position you want to add a mark to display a cursor To add a mark to the most recent data perform step 3 in monitor mode Step 2 is not necessary On the Project menu click Append Mark and then Current Group or All Groups Or click the Current Group or All Groups icon A mark is added to the specified position Mark File Edit View Project Operation CESKA EEE fe gt Markt User Help 9 weed E E re r2 r2 Boome vs Aloo eL T Alpooo Be L e Adding a Mark to the Current Group If you select Current Group a mark is added only to the group shown on the trend monitor e Adding a Mark to All Groups If you select All Groups when data is being collected using PC time a mark is added to all groups If data is being collected using device time In playback mode a mark is added at the same position as cursor A to all display groups that contain tags of the same devi
164. er strings that appear on the screen Example Voltage Images The images used in this manual may differ from those that actually appear in the software Such differences do not affect the procedural explanation Version and Functions Described in This Manual Ed Product Addition and Change 1 Ver 1 01 xx 2 Ver 1 02 xx Modified to upport GX GP R2 Expansion to Modbus Device Definition Files UTA advanced series other improvements changes to display and system requirements 3 Ver 2 01 xx Modified to support GM10 Modified to include mail function enhancements language switching and the following options Report Print function RP OPC UA server function UA and Math function MT 4 Ver 2 02 xx Modified for functional improvements retention of settings when connected devices are added warning display when communication is disconnected etc Revisions 1st Edition February 2014 2nd Edition June 2014 3th Edition January 2015 4th Edition April 2015 Software License Agreement IMPORTANT PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE INSTALLING OR USING THANK YOU VERY MUCH FOR SELECTING SOFTWARE OF YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION YOKOGAWA BY INSTALLING OR OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE DO NOT INSTALL NOR USE THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND PROMPTLY RETURN IT TO THE PLACE OF PURCHASE FORA REFUN
165. erent types of data that indicates errors Data Description OVER Over range data OVER Over range data SKIP Channels that have been set to skipped INVALID Invalid data The data type and decimal place specified on the Tag Setting Page do not match those of the collected data BURNOUT Burnout data ILLEGAL Illegal data LACK Indicates that the device failed to acquire the data OFF Indicates one of the following conditions e Data collection has not been performed since the project was opened e Channels are not assigned to tags e When the data time is set to PC time the collected data is SKIP data e Communication error condition e initialized condition as a result of changing the Device Setting Page or Tag Setting Page while data collection is stopped e An attempt was made to collect data from a device using the backfill function but there is no data recorded in the device 4 10 3Reflecting Changes Made on the Monitor Page to the Setting Page If the access privilege is Owner or Manager changes made to the following settings on the Monitor Page are reflected on the corresponding Setting Page Display Group or Acquisition amp Monitor If the access privilege is Operator or Monitor the changes are not reflected e Monitor Set size adjustment e Waveform display on off state Y axis display on off state Detail Compact Zoom in Zoom out and movement in the Trend Monitor S
166. ernal private key Creating a Self Signed Certificate A server certificate is typically issued by a certification authority CA signing a certificate signing request CSR This function can generate a self signed certificate that can be used when a certification authority CA signature is not necessary A self signed certificate can be generated from the internal private key and installed Creating a Certificate Signing Request CSR A certificate signing request CSR to be signed by a certification authority CA can be created It is created from the internal private key available at the time of execution H uondo yn uonouny 13m3 YWN DdO Chapter 7 OPC UA Server Function UA option 7 2 OPC UA Server Project This section describes the various setting pages of the OPC UA server function and how the operations differ from those of normal projects 7 2 1 Project List Page When GA10 with the OPC UA server function starts the Project Page shows a single OPC UA server project You cannot delete this project Nor can you change its basic information The following figure shows the initial screen that appears when you log in to GA10 with the OPC UA server function Note that because an OPC UA server project does not have a recording function record control buttons are disabled and adding marks is also not allowed Monitoring and recording are disabled Selected 7 4 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 7 OPC UA Server
167. ers GetEndpoints CreateSession ActivateSession CloseSession Browse BrowseNext TranslateBrowsePathsToNodelds RegisterNodes UnregisterNodes Read CreateMonitoredltems ModifyMonitoredltems DeleteMonitoredltems SetMonitoringMode CreateSubscription ModifySubscription DeleteSubscriptions Publish Republish SetPublishingMode OPC UA clients access privileges are controlled by the GA10 s user management function The user privilege relationship between GA10 and OPC UA client users is shown below GA10 User Privileges OPC UA Client User Privileges Owner Read Write Manager Read Write Operator Read Write Monitor Read Only LAZO QOQA OPC UA clients can access GA10 only while data collection is in progress CLLK 7 1 H uondo yn uonouny 13m3S YWN OdO Chapter 7 OPC UA Server Function UA option 7 1 2 GA10 Data Structure M Root Object 5 ain gt Channel Data DB ChannelName_001 7 EURange 7 EngineeringUnits i 7 InstrumentRange l lt _ Status lt __ Model Name All Alarm Status 1 _ Serial Number lt _ Alarm 1 Status __ Chanel Daa F Z Alarm 2 Status 4 I lt Alarm 4 Status GA Channel Data Node 1 Description Class Data Type Note Server Server information Object Yokogawa Logger Data Object
168. es a OOO Llc Cc i ai l File View e Start a Stop Pause Resume Restart All Tasks Refresh Properties Help The status turns blank Extended 4 Standard Fi eis Help m gt e n mw service e service n C Data Logging Software Name Diagnostic Policy Sh Diagnostic Service S Diagnostic System S Disk Defragmenter Distributed Link Tr Sh Distributed Transa o E 4DLGServe S DNS Client Gh Encrypting File Sy Sh Extensible Authen S Fax GA FLEXnet Licensing S Function Discover S Function Discover Sh Google Software Ci Google Update S4 Google Update 4 Group Policy Client Sh Health Key and Ce Sh HomeGroup Liste Description The Diagno The Diagno The Diagno Provides Dis Maintains li Coordinates The DNS Cli Provides th The Extensi Enables you This service The FDPHO Publishes th Google F Google Y Google Y The service Provides X 5 Makes local Status Started Started Started started Started Started Started Startup Type Automatic Manual Manual Manual Automatic Manual Automatic Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual Automatic Manual Automatic D Manual Automatic Manual Manual LogOnAs Local Service Local Service Local Syste Local Syste Local Syste Network S Networ
169. es not exist For the procedure see 3 3 3 Setting Tags Math Tag Setting Page Selecting Math Tag displays the Math Tag Setting Page The basic math tag functions are the same as those for normal projects However because there is no recording function the corresponding column does not exist For the procedure see 3 5 1 Setting Math Tags Mo WC Before using the Math function set the data time acquisition condition to PC time This is set using Data time on the Server Setting Page described later If set to Device time the Acquisition amp Computing check box for the math tag will be cleared and you will not be able to set math tags iii ddd sddddcccddddddddadadadddddddadddddddaddaddddadaddaddddddde Server Setting Page Selecting Server Operation displays the Server Setting Page The details are described on the next page Access amp Others Setting Page Selecting Access amp Others displays the Access amp Others Setting Page The function is the same as that for normal projects For the procedure see 3 3 8 Setting Project Access Privileges 7 6 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 7 OPC UA Server Function UA option 7 2 4 Server Setting Page On the OPC UA server project setting page selecting Server Operation displays the Server Setting Page see the following figure F l Data Logging Software admin OPC UA o S X File Edit View Project Operation User Help Bs oe me
170. et e Trip line position 4 10 4Changing the Time on the Device after Starting Data Collection and Recording Do not change the time on the device after starting data collection and recording because doing so will cause adverse effects on the monitor screen and recorded data Related topic Changes to devices during data collection and recording gt Q11 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 4 Monitoring Data Collection 4 11 Viewing the Log You can view the log that the server sends in the Log dialog box You can open the Log dialog box at any time when you are logged in to the server The dialog box stays open until you close it 4 11 1 Displayed Content in the Log Dialog Box Up to 1000 log events that occur from when the user logs in to the server until the user logs out are displayed There are two types of logs system log displayed in yellow which deals with the server and project log displayed in blue which deals with projects System log includes events such as server login and logout Project log includes data collection start and stop System logs are sent to all users Project logs are sent to users that have the projects opened 4 11 2 Opening the Log Dialog Box On the View menu click Log The log dialog box opens Filter Fitter E all E Project Project admin excutes stopping collecting Projecti A K002 z Project1 admin excutes collecting Projecti PAK001 z Project1 admin excutes stopping c
171. etting Page or the Registered Devices List xxx indicates the name of the device that will be deleted W2003 Do you want to delete this data file s This message asks whether you want to delete the data file from the Data files Page xxx indicates the name of the data file that will be deleted W2004 Do you want to delete the Project s This message asks whether you want to delete the project xxx indicates the name of the project that will be deleted W2005 The release number s of handled meters is out of The release number of the device is not supported Thus proper data support collection cannot be guaranteed Consider updating the firmware or using a supported device For the supported models and versions See the General Specifications GS 04L65B01 01EN W2006 Total number of channels of registered devices This message notifies that when you are registering a device to the exceeded the supported range device list or updating the device information the total number of channels of registered devices exceeds the number of tags that can be supported Click OK to proceed with the operation W2007 If changed to Device time math tags will be unavailable This message appears when you try to change Data time to Device time The Math function works when PC time is selected Clicking OK will change the setting to Device time Clicking Cancel will discard the earn W2008 Option configuration of project does not have This message appears when
172. etup items in columns 1 2 3 Data Logging Software admin Project B1 File Edit View Pioject Opefation User Help Bs oe meee Ox JF F ia ie ae P foe peoa eoe en en aenn Nen Group HGY 3 peace Group 01 3 Tag Waveform List Ls Tag Index so Mode M i e _ i Y01 Detail F ON Of F Ca amm Pr a Y02 Detail Linear F COU OX _ Display Group Ej wo3 Yo03 Detail Linear M F COM Of A Acquisition amp Monitor E wot 4 Yo04 Detail Linear M F COH Ow yo5 Detail Linear GIN F COM ow Taano Yo06 Detail Linear M F OH Of F 2 Record p Yo07 Detail Linear IM F OU ow a m Y08 Detail Linear GIN F COM O a EJ Emaii Yoo Detail Linear M F COM Of Y10 Detail Linear GIN F OM Of B e Y11 Detail Linear GIN F OU Of Ea Accessaothers Y12 Detail Linear iM F 0U ow amp Y13 Detail Linear oe F OH Of x F COH OW Displays the waveform of the select number 7 F Oil Om 7 w vet w emva wid F ow 7 v17 Detail Linear M F OM Of Y18 Detail Linear M F OH Of y19 Detail Linear M F COM OR Y20 Detail Linear GIN F OU Of Y21 Detail Linear M F ON Of Y22 Detail Linear M F 0U O Y23 Detail Linear M F OH Of Y24 Detail Linear M F OOH Of Fre es Y25 Detail Linear GIN F OU
173. ev Day 01 30 00 to Current Day 01 30 00 Data times will take on the following values Hourly data yyyymmdd yyyymmdd yyyymmdd yyyymmdd yyyymmdd yyyymmdd Daily data yyyymmdd 02 30 00 03 30 00 04 30 00 23 30 00 00 30 00 01 30 00 01 30 00 3 71 Bulpiooay pue UO DAIJOD ejyeg Hulyieyg pue Hulsnbyuoy Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 72 When Condition Is Set to Every Week or When Report Type Is Set to Daily Weekly Below is the display example for Condition and Range when Condition is set to Every Week Time span 2 weeks Scale day of week steps SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN Condition Every Week Range Start Time Prev Week we End Time Current Week Condition time TT I ES SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN Start Time End time Item Default Selectable Range Value Condition Every Every Week Every Week Week Sunday to Sunday Saturday 00 00 00 Hour 00 to 23 Minute 00 to 59 Range Standard Prev Week Prev Week and Start Time 0 00 00 or later on Sunday of Prev Print Sunday Current Week Week Custom Print 0 00 00 to Day of week End Time Up to the specified time on the specified Current Sunday to day of the condition Week Saturday The maximum time between start and end is 7 Sunday Hour 00 to 23 0 00 00 Minute 00 to 59 Second 00 to 59 days Start Time lt End
174. execute the schedule You cannot select more than one schedule at once p Report Print History Pn s _Refresh Display the details Open the reportfile Re execu ite Tasi Output Execute Absolute Time Schedule Name Condition d Type Print Report File Completed 2014 12 24 16 47 31 000 Report02 Every Hour 01 00 Custo it _ Exist None Completed 2014 12 24 16 45 00 000 Report01 Everyday 16 45 00 Report Output Hourly Daily None Completed 2014 12 24 16 47 31 000 Report01 Everyday 16 45 00 Report Output Hourly Daily N 20141224164500_ No 20141224164731_ No 1 Refresh Click this button to refresh the list 2 Display the details Select a schedule from the list and click this button to display the details of the schedule 3 Open the report file Select a schedule from the list and click this button to display the report file that has been generated 4 Re execute Click this button to re execute the selected schedule Me WCC e Ahistory of up to the most recent 100 schedules is displayed e Clicking an item name in the list sorts the list using the item The first click specifies ascending order the second descending order The sort condition is displayed with an icon next to the item name e Entries whose schedule result is error are displayed using red characters xiii hdd dddsiddcccccadaddddddddddddddaddadaddadadadadddddddadddadadadada IM 04L65
175. f days recording duration e If you use the report print function on a 32 bit operating system the following limitations apply to the maximum recording time or the number of recording tags We recommend that you use this function on a 64 bit operating system If Condition Is Set to Recording is finished or Batch Maximum Recording Duration calculated for 1 6 GB of memory Recording Interval 100 ms 1s 10s 100 Approx 3 days Approx 14 5 days Approx 14 5 days Number of tags 500 Approx 15 hours Approx 3 days Approx 3 days 2000 Approx 3 hours Approx 17 hours Approx 17 hours If Condition Is Not Set to Recording is finished or Batch Maximum Number of Recording Tags calculated for 1 6 GB of memory Recording Interval 100 ms 1s 10s Every Hour 2200 2200 2200 Everyday 291 1456 1456 Sau E 41 208 208 Every Month 9 46 46 3 58 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording Basic Operation IM 04L65B01 01EN The following procedure is for setting a schedule and printing automatically 1 Select Report Print in the navigation area on the left of the window Report Print appears when the license for the Report Print function RP option is already registered The Report Setting Page appears See the figure on the next page e The Report Setting Page consists of a tabbed page area for setting schedules in the top half and an area for registering template files in the lower half You can registe
176. f recording End of recording to file 1 to file 1 to file 2 to file 2 The following settings are available on the Record Setting Page e Record Interval e Record File Type e Start Stop Condition e File Division e Number of Files e Folder e File Name e Comment The details of these settings are provided in the following pages M8 WCC e The data recording settings vary depending on whether the data collection condition was set to PC time or Device time Also the handling of alarm information and the number of record data files vary gt page 3 29 e Ifthe server stops for some reason during recording recording will resume when the server recovers However if the server is stopped manually or if the PC in which the server is installed stops the data file is cut at this point and saved Recording will not resume even if the server is restarted When the server stops gt page 8 6 LL dsdddddddddddddcdddddaddddddddadddddddaddddddddadddddadddddddddadddddddddddddddadddddddadaddddddadddddddddddddddddddda IM 04L65B01 01EN 3 27 Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording Click here to display the Record Setting Page QB Data Logging Software jadmin Project B1 File Edit View Project Operation User Help Hitea nab e
177. following types of access privileges are available r a G Owner Manager Operator Monitor Project access privileges gt page 3 38 Ga uoljeieddig Chapter 2 Preparation 2 7 Other Optional Operations 2 7 1 Starting Restarting and Stopping the Server To manually start or stop the GA10 server follow the procedure below A IMPORTANT Before stopping the server stop data collection and recording and log out Checking Whether the Server Is Running 1 On the Start menu click Control Panel and Administrative Tools and double click Services The Services window appears i Sh Services lela x T File Action View Help a b H aell D DSI Si Services Local Select an item to view its description Name z Description Status Startup Type LogOnAs 3 Gi ActiveX Installer Provides Us Manual Local Syste Gh Adaptive Brightness Monitors a Manual Local Service C Adobe Acrobat U Adobe Acro Started Automatic Local Syste C Adobe Flash Playe z Manual Local Syste G Application Experi Processes a Started Manual Local Syste S Application Identity Determines Manual Local Service Application Infor Facilitates t Started Manual Local Syste S4 Application Layer Provides su Manual Local Service G Application Mana Processes in Manual Local Syste Background Intelli Transfers fil St
178. ftware which Yokogawa is granted a right to sublicense or distribute by third party suppliers including affiliates of Yokogawa Third Party Software If suppliers of the Third Party Software Supplier provide special terms and conditions for the Third Party Software which differ from this Agreement the special terms and conditions separately provided by Yokogawa shall prevail over this Agreement Some software may be licensed to you directly by Supplier 2 7 The Software Product may contain open source software OSS for which the special terms and conditions separately provided by Yokogawa shall take precedence over this Agreement 2 3 Restrictions on Application 3 1 Unless otherwise agreed in writing between you and Yokogawa the Software Product is not intended designed produced or licensed for use in relation to aircraft operation or control ship navigation or marine equipment control or ground facility or device for support of the aforesaid operation or control or for use in relation to rail facility nuclear related facility radiation related equipment or medical equipment or facility or under any other circumstances which may require high safety standards 3 2 If the Software Product is used for the abovementioned purposes neither Yokogawa nor Supplier assumes liability for any claim or damage arising from the said use and you shall indemnify and hold Yokogawa Supplier their affiliates subcontractors officers dire
179. ge Alarm Status Easy Easy or Detail Comm Status Communication Communication Disconnect Communication Recover Loss Data Disconnect Specified Period Everyday Everyday Time Time 00 00 00 Every Week Sunday to Saturday Time Every Month 1st to 31st Time Specified Time 00 01 00 Enter the trigger time interval File is created No trigger setting 1 If you select Easy set Tag Range and Level 1 to Level 4 If you select Detail select the alarm level for each tag in the Select alarm dialog box shown on the next page 3 32 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording IM 04L65B01 01EN If Send Condition Is Alarm Status and Trigger Is Set to Easy Start tag button End tag button Condition Alarm Status Comm Status O Specified Period O Specified Duration O File is created TRIG Easy ODetail 1 Click the start tag button of Tag Range Tag Range A Tag Index dialog box appears 2 Select the start tag C Taone O 5 Level2 Level3 Level4 Click to select the level Tag 0021 Taa 0023 if Taa 0024 13 The Tag Index dialog box closes and the selection is reflected on the Email Event Setting Page 3 Likewise set the end tag The tag range is now set on the Email Event Setting Page 4 Specify the changes in the alarm levels of Level 1 to Level 4 If Send Condition Is Alarm Status and Trigger Is Set to Detail Condition Alarm
180. he GA10 server is installed e Port Number GA10 server port number default value 50310 e User Name User name already set on GA10 default value admin e Password The password of the above user default value blank N O t e Wicca Make sure that the version of the added client is the same as the server version MMMM UUM IM IMI MIMI aa a ddd bd bd ddd db dd ddd bd ddd bd dd ddd dd ddd bd dd ddd dtd 2 10 2 7 4 Checking the Number of Channels Tags and Options That Can Be Used You can check the maximum number of channels tags and the options that can be used in the server information dialog box On the Help menu click Server Information to display the information of the server that you are logged in to Maximum number of channels tags and options Server Version SMARTDAC Data Logging Software Server x86 R2 01 01 B01 iy Copyright C 2014 2015 Yokogawa Electric Corporation Software Japan Server is licensed to YHQ Doc 400 0000 99856 MS86 401 0040 99856 4MBK Item Display Description Maximum number of number of Display example 500 channels tags tags Math function availability MT Displayed when the Math function option or added with an upgrade is available Report Print function RP Displayed when the availability Report Print function option or added with an upgrade is available Displayed when the OPC UA server function option or added with an upgrade i
181. he OPC UA server name using a character string e Default value GA10 UA Server e Input range Up to 20 characters You cannot set this when monitoring is in progress 2 Port No Enter the OPC UA port number e Default value 4840 e Input range 1025 to 65535 If the input is outside the range the value will be reset to 4840 default value You cannot set this when monitoring is in progress 3 Anonymous Login Select Allow to allow anonymous connection from an OPC UA client The privilege for such connection is ReadOnly e Default value Allow e Options Allow Prohibit You cannot set this when monitoring is in progress e Server Certificate Certificate information Version V3 Issuer GA10 UAServer CPC001 13654 06 Serial No 5d 22 47 f5 d0 Valid from 2014 11 17 15 44 32 Signature Algorithm sha1WithRSAEncryption Valid to 2037 12 02 06 00 00 Signature Hash Algorithm SHA 1 Install a certificate Generate a self signed certiffrate Issue a certificate signing request amp SR The Server Certificate area shows the certificate information see the following table Item Name Description Version Certificate version Serial No Certificate serial number Signature Algorithm Certificate signature algorithm Signature Hash Algorithm Certificate signature hash algorithm Issuer Certificate issuer Common name Valid from Start of the certificate s valid period Valid to End of the certif
182. he action bar which is at the bottom of the window The result varies depending on the type of icon you press on the action bar see the following table To select the range The procedure is the same as explained on gt page 3 18 Type Name Result Show or hide Switches the check box state between Enable or disable selected and unselected F Type E Type Switches the item selection state 6 If the data values in the selected range are not all the same clicking this icon will switch all of them to match the first data value in the selected range Increment Assigns increasing tag index numbers starting with the first tag in the selected range Default Resets the value to default Y axis grouping d unit Y axis grouping unit amp scale Groups Y axes whose unit is the same together Groups Y axes whose unit and scale value are the same together jJ Copy Copies the settings of the first tag in the selected range to the other tags in the selected range Switches between selected and Copy flag unselected states for items to be pasted when copying setup data The items are normally selected pasted Clicking this button causes the corresponding column to become unselected and will not be pasted to You can also copy and paste selected content using the Edit menu Assigning Tags Automatically Tags assigned on the Tag Setting Page can be assigned automatically to
183. hen the report type is Batch or Daily custom Set the data recording interval e Default value 10min e Options 1min 2min 3min 4min 5min 10min 15min 30min 1hour 5 Filename Naming Rule e Default value Auto e Options Auto Specify When Auto is selected PDF file name example YYYYMMDDhhmmss_ serial number pdf Excel file name example YYYYMMDDhhmmss_ serial number xlsx When Specify is selected You can specify the front text string of the report file name Enter up to 32 characters The default value is Report PDF file name example Report YYYYMMDDhhmmss_serial number pdf Excel file name example Report YYYYMMDDhhmmss _ serial number xlsx YYYY year MM month DD day hh hour mm minute and ss Seconds are the date and time of the condition date 6 Output Folder Select the folder to save the generated reports in e Default value Data Folder e Options Data Folder Subfolder in the data folder Specified Folder Save Location Description Data Folder Displays the GA10 data folder Example C Users Public Documents SMARTDAC Data Logging Software Data Subfolder in the data folder Enter the name of a subfolder in the data folder Enter up to 255 characters Specified Folder Enter the path to the specified folder or use the Browse button to specify it When entering the path use up to 255 characters 7 Template File From the list select the template file tpl to apply to printing or an Exc
184. hing not possible wy X q Register devices to connect S 332 Sec 3 2 2 O _ vy Register devices to connect Set the collection and record interval Set the data save destination Switching possible Sec 3 2 3 Sec 3 3 3 Set display groups V Set the data collection method Sec 3 3 5 V Register monitoring Sec 3 3 5 Set data recording method Sec 3 3 6 V Set mail settings Sec 3 3 7 Set project access privileges SZ Sec 3 2 3 Sec 3 3 4 Configuration Sec 3 3 8 Start collection and recording sec 3 2 4 Start collection and recording Sec 3 3 11 Monitor data View recorded results Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 IM 04L65B01 01EN 2 1 Chapter 2 Preparation 2 2 Installation The GA10 installer package includes a server client and viewer programs Executing the procedure below installs all programs in a single PC The server runs as a Windows service and starts running as soon as it is installed Hereafter a PC with the server function installed will be referred to as a server PC Me WCC e Install the programs as a Windows administrator For Windows XP log on as an administrator For Windows Vista or later start as step 2 in the following procedure e Uninstall GA10 before reinstalling xviii hdd gdh sssdccccccdddddddcddcccacacdadddddddddddddddddaada The procedure here is explained for Windows 7 1 Double c
185. ht c 1998 1999 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE The password management function of the following product uses Heimdal source code for AES authentication key generation In accordance with the Heimdal license agreement the copyright notice redistribution conditions and license are listed below SMARTDAC STANDARD Universal Viewer Copyright c 2006 Kungliga Tekniska H gskolan Royal Institute of Technology Stockh
186. icate s valid period The area will be blank if there is no certificate Clicking the Install a certificate Generate a self signed certificate or Issue a certificate signing request CSR button displays a dialog box for executing or creating the relevant item For the procedure see the next page 7 8 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 7 OPC UA Server Function UA option Basic Operation 1 Installation of certificate 1 Click Installation of certificate An Open dialog box appears ga Open _ 33 Look in P Cert E E gt fly P Name Date modified Type 7 lopc ua der 2014 11 17 Security Cer Recent Places Desktop _ ba Libraries j A 4 Computer File name ope uader bg Q Files of type Certificate Files der X 2 Select the certificate file der that you want to install and click Open The certificate is installed and the server certificate information is updated If registration fails an error E3057 will appear Basic Operation 2 Generate a self signed certificate 1 Click Generate a self signed certificate A Generate a self signed certificate dialog box appears 2 Enter the items The input ranges are as follows e Country 2 alphabet characters e State City Alphanumeric characters spaces and symbols Up to 128 characters Prohibited characters 8 amp e Organization Organization Unit Common Name E Mail address Alphanumeric characters spaces
187. ile Excel file Number of Graph Print Pages Multiple pages Single page Single page 3 57 Builpiooay pue UO DAIJOD ejyeg Hulyieysg pue Hulsnbiyuoy Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording When using the Report Print function RP option note the following points e Report schedule is executed only when a project is Recording e Report output and auto printing may be delayed up to 10 minutes depending on the specified conditions This is because the execution time is shifted after a temporary file is created internally e If the recording duration is long and the number of data points in the target range is large standard print custom print and report output may take time e To perform custom print or report output you must specify a template file page 3 61 e If Data time is set to Device time and data of multiple devices is being recorded data is saved to separate files for each device and for each data acquisition interval Therefore report files are also created for each device and for each data acquisition interval If Data time is set to PC time a single report file is created even when multiple devices are being recorded e The printers that can be used with the Report Print function are the local printers registered on the server PC Network printers are not displayed in print settings Virtual printers of local printers are displayed but interactive virtual printers e g WindowsXPS DocumentWri
188. ing Recording data The way that the server handles recording data when communication is restored varies depending on whether data is being collected in PC time or device time e If data is being collected using PC time The data during which communication was not possible will not be recorded e If data is being collected using device time After communication is restored the server prioritizes the collection of data that can be gathered in real time through communication Then the server collects data that could not be collected from devices and fills the missing data in the recorded data files This function is called backfill Backfill only works when the necessary conditions are met If the conditions are not met the data during which communication was not possible will not be recorded See Q4 How does backfill work A4 When a communication error occurs between a server and device data dropout occurs in the data file that the server is recording Backfill is a function that fills the dropped data in the recording file by retrieving the missing data from the device after the system recovers Data is retrieved automatically from the device when the following conditions are met Operating conditions On the GA10 side e Applicable data Binary data Excel data is not included e Data time is set to Device time On the connected device side e Applicable devices GX10 GX20 GP10 GP20 DX1000 DX2000 DX1000N DX1000T DX2000T FX1
189. ing Software GA10 is used to collect data from measuring instruments and controllers via communication and monitor and record the collected data Recorded data can be displayed and printed from the Viewer software To use GA10 you need a PC that can connect to target devices The connection between the PC and target devices is established through Ethernet communication serial communication or USB communication GM only You can use the Simple Settings mode to easily start data collection Server and Client GA10 is a client server software application Users perform various server operations from a client The server collects records and manages data received from connected devices on the basis of the instructions received from the client When you install GA10 to a single PC the client function and server function are installed together You can also install GA10CL which is a version that contains only the client function in other PCs Multiple clients can simultaneously access a single server GA10 Data TCS Instruction to collection Em the server A Operation User collection Response to the client Data Emm Connectivity with Many Devices GA10 is a software application that consolidates various devices connected over a network and performs data collection GA10 can connect to YOKOGAWA recorders and data loggers It can also collect data that has been acquired by YOKOGAWA s data acquisition software MX
190. iod and the period is set to the 31st of every month for months that do not have 31 days the date is automatically set to the last day of the month e If you set the start condition to Specified Time you cannot specify a nonexistent time due to DST daylight saving time transition e Ifthe specified time overlaps due to the DST transition the first time is used to start recording iii hdd ddd scdcccccccddddddddddddaddaaadadaddddddddddddaddadadaaddde 3 28 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording If the Start Condition is set to Alarm 1 Set Start Condition to Alarm The tag range Level 1 to 4 and Alarm Change are displayed Tag range 7 Alarm Tag Range Jag 0001 Tag 0100 Cl Levelt Level2 Level3 Level4 Alarm Change OFF to ON LS Alarm levels 2 Click the first or last tag selection button The Tag Index dialog box appears 3 Select the applicable tag range The dialog box closes and the tag selection button display changes to the selected tag 4 Select Level alarm level 5 Set the Alarm Change to OFF to ON alarm activated state or ON to OFF alarm released State Click the Start Recording button to enter the record ing standby state When the monitored alarm reach es the specified alarm value recording starts If the Stop Condition is set to Alarm The setting procedu
191. ion On GA10 with the Report Print function RP option you can view the execution schedule and history of reports and printing that have been set Click the Status Page icon S on the Project tab to display the Status Page The Report Print History and Report Print Schedule tabs appear behind the device status tab described earlier Device Running State Report Print History ReportvPrint Schedule 4 8 1 Report Print Schedule The Report Print Schedule tab shows the print execution schedule in a list To view the details of a selected schedule you can click Display the details Displays the details of the selected schedule Updates the display Device Running State Report Print History ReportPrint Schedule Refresh Display the details Task Output Condition Task Type Print Report File On Execute Absolute Time Schedule Name Plan 2014 12 25 14 30 00 000 Report01 Everyday 14 30 00 Standard Print Exist None Plan 2014 12 28 08 00 00 000 Report 02 Every Week Sunday 08 00 Standard Print Exist None On The following items are displayed in the list If all the items do not fit on the screen you can use the scroll bar to see the hidden items Execute Plan Absolute Time The time when the schedule will be executed Schedule The name of the report schedule Name For projects whose Data time is set to Device time the name will be schedule name device n
192. is recorded and is not related to the number of tags iii dd ddd ssdccccccddddddddddcaaddaaaaadddddddddddaddadadaaddde 3 29 Buipiosay pue uona geq Bunes pue Bulinbyu05 D Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 6 Number of Files You can limit the number of data files that are saved from the start of recording to the end of recording When the number of data files reaches the limit the oldest file is deleted to save the most recent file The handling of the number of files is different when the data time of collected data is set to PC time or Device time The range of values that you can enter is 4 to 100 PC time Because the data of every device is saved ina single file the number of data files of one iteration from recording start to recording stop is applicable Device time Because a file is saved for each device or each interval the number of data files of one iteration from recording start to recording stop for each device or interval is applicable 7 Folder Specify the data file save destination Default destination C Documents and Settings All Users Documents SMARTDAC Data Logging Software Data C Users Public Documents SGMARTDAC Data Logging Software Data Server PC Operation System Windows XP Windows Vista 7 8 Mle WH We recommend you use the default setting for the data save destination folder If you want to change the save destination s
193. isplay Waveform 0 Ceecee 08 roun 05 Group 05 J Group G7 J Group G8 Group 09 feroun 10 Group 7 Group 2 Group 13 rowel Group Name Group 01 No Waveform List 7 Specify the Y axis grid line spacing 8 Waveform display position Group 01 Group Name roup03 croup od Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Linea IK Linea M Linea M Linea I4 OOOO amp Ow Meter type Type the display range 0 Trip line settings 9 Waveform color Group 05 cebu 06 Group 07 Waveform List Scale IntervalE Group 08 crou 08 rou 10 Group 1 Group 12 croup 13 Use Value Setup Item_ 1 No These are waveform numbers assigned sequentially starting with W01 You cannot change the numbers Click the boxes to specify whether to display the waveform 2 Tag Specify the tag to assign to the waveform Clicking a button displays a separate window Select a tag number to apply it to the sheet 3 Y Axis No Specify the Y axis to use in the waveform display Mode Select Detail or Compact mode Type Specify the type of scale to add to the Y scale of the waveform Select Linear or Logarithmic Title Type the Y axis title of the waveform Enter up to 30 characters 4 Form Set the display format on the Monitor Page to fixed point
194. isplaying the Data Collection Status You can monitor data collection in the following page Client and server communication status Project tab Start and stop data monitoring Not monitoring Ma Monitoring Start and stop data recording amp Not recording w Recording Setting Page Monitor Page Status Page Data files Page Close j o Mi amp m rm ai o _ N Al o00 6e 1 09 40 00 e Client and Server Communication Status The client and server communication status is indicated as Good Ordinary or Bad Project Tab The tab shows the project name and operation icons The project alarm status is indicated in red Blinking red Alarm occurring Solid red Alarm acknowledged e Start and Stop Data Monitoring Click to start or stop data collection e Start and Stop Data Recording Click to start or stop data recording Setting Page Monitor Page Status Page and Data files Page Click to display the corresponding page Setting Page section 3 2 section 3 3 Monitor Page section 4 1 2 Status Page gt section 4 7 Data files Page gt section 5 1 IM 04L65B01 01EN e Close Click to close the project e Viewing the Project Status in the Project List Page Click the aq icon to show the Project List Page You can view the project status Data not being monitored BS Projecti Data monitoring in progress The boundary color changes TE Data recording standby Pr
195. itations e You cannot specify the data collection and record interval on GA10 The acquisition interval of each device is used e If different acquisition intervals are used during recording in different devices or even within the same device the collected data will be saved to separate files according to the intervals e The trend monitor on the Monitor Page displays data based on a single time axis Therefore if there are multiple devices whose time or interval is different in a display group the Monitor Set will be divided and waveforms in the display group will be displayed in windows divided at the interval level Only up to four divided windows can be displayed Anything in excess will not be displayed e A similar behavior will also occur in alarm lists The page will be divided and the lists will be displayed separately at the device level If there are multiple acquisition intervals in the same device the page will not be divided at the interval level but at the device level Li hh hhh dbbdiddddddcdccdcdcddcddcdccccdccccccccccccccccccccccdccccde If PC time is selected If PC time is selected data will be created using synchronized timestamps You can specify the data collection interval and record interval and save data to a single data file during recording There are no display limitations on the Monitor Page ZTO e Data collected using PC time will not necessarily be the same as those of the corresponding devices gt
196. ject in Detail Settings mode m 7 Start GA10 and log in Reduced Expanded The Project List Page appears 2 On the File menu click Create New Project Ls configuring the project proceed to section Type the project name and comment Set Settings Mode to Detail Settings Exporting and Importing You can export the information of a created project to a file pjf extension This file is referred to as the project information Comment file The procedure to export and import a project is explained below Create New project Project s Name Settings Mode Simple Settings Detail Settings Export proced ure 1 From the list of projects select the project that you 4 Click OK want to export A new project is created in the Project List Page E File Edit View Project Operation User Hel File Edit View Project Operation User Help is i a ee Ht oe wh hh Ht oe we wh amp JTF ia ee H coo Click to select 2 On the File menu click Export Project i 3 Select the save destination assign a name and save it Sawe in Libraries i i Documents After you create a project configure it Double click the Rec n Sp Library project that you want to configure to open the initial setting E Pictures R page RA Library Library Configuration navigation area od r e x Libraries s ration Help 7 TS Computer A File name Projecti Save as type P
197. k Custom Print A Custom Print dialog box appears Custom Print Data File Data did Template File Server O Local Printer Adobe PDF Output Language English Graph Graph 1 Print Type Trend Graph Range 2014 11 07 16 09 22 2014 11 07 16 11 56 Group Group01 Printout Setup Line Thick 1 0pt l Tag Display Form Y Axis Column Num 1 Legend Yes O No Color Mode Black White O Color Mark Color Print Quality Standard O High Cx IM 04L65B01 01EN 5 3 eeg HBulpiooay Huibeuew Chapter 5 Managing Recording Data 4 Select the template file to apply to printing To use a template registered in GA10 click Server To use a template from a PC click Local 5 Click Browse This example assumes that Server has been selected A Template File dialog box appears If you selected Local in step 4 a standard Open dialog box will appear Template File 1 RepTempSample_B DataTime tpl 2RepTempSample_C_1page tpl 3 RepTempSample_HD tpl 4 6 From the list select the template file you want to use The dialog box closes and the template appears in the Custom Print dialog box Set the Print Type Range Group and Printout Setup items on the Graph 1 to 4 tabs 8 Click OK Printing will be executed Data File Displays the data file name of the print target line
198. k S Local Syste Local Syste Network S Local Syste Local Service Local Service Local Syste Local Syste Local Syste Local Syste Local Syste Local Syste _ EO To start the server on the Action menu click Start Click Restart on the Action menu to stop the server once and restart The status shows Started IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 2 Preparation Changing the Server Startup Type from 2 7 2 Changing the Server Port Number Automatic to Manual By default the GA10 server port number is set to 50310 If necessary change the port number by 1 Carry out steps 1 to 3 in the previous section to stop following the procedure below the server 1 On the PC that the server is installed open Control 2 In the Services window double click DLGServer lt i Panel from the Start menu The DLGServer Properties appear BS Tce a Comonnl Ls 2 Click Administrative Tools to display a list of o eee eae i General Log On Recovery Dependencies available tools 2 Service name DLGServer Display name DLGServer Desoription iii Data Logging Software Server P Organize v Path to executable lt z VE T Name Date modified Type Size C Program Files Yokogawa Electric Corporation SMARTDAC Data Logging Startup t na x l gt Component Services 2009 07 14 13 46 Shortcut 2 KB artu e omatic ha Paye Automate oo A Computer Management 200
199. l ODetail 7 Access amp Others Sending Basic Settings Sentfrom 5 Sent to cc Title amp D 0 BA Custom Header Content Message Language 6 English Attached Files 7 C Alarm Information Instantaneous Value Range Tag 0001 Tag 0001 O Individual 1 Name Enter the name of the mail event This name becomes the tab name Default values Mail01 to Mail20 Input range Up to 30 characters 2 On Off Enable or disable the mail event setting The default value is OFF Selecting ON displays a setting page 3 Condition and 4 Trigger Select the conditions for sending email Default value Alarm Status Send Conditions Description Alarm Status Send an email when the alarm of the specified tag changes Comm Status Send an email when the communication status between the server and a data acquisition device changes or when a data dropout occurs on the server Specified Period Send an email at specified intervals Such as everyday every week and every month or at a specific time within the interval Specified Time Send an email at specified intervals after data acquisition starts File is created Send an email when the creation of a data file is completed Depending on the send condition you select the trigger display changes as shown in the following table Send Conditions Trigger Default Value Ran
200. l of each device 1 Record interval when set to PC time 100 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s 5s 10 s 20 s 30 s 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min limited to an integer multiple of the monitor interval Record interval when set to device time Same as the monitor interval of GA10 Maximum number of recording channels tags 2200 2000 tags and 200 math tags on models with the Math function Number of display groups 50 Number of channels tags per display group 50 Language 2 English Japanese Chinese French German Russian Korean 1 MX MW MXLOGGER 10ms shortest 2 Make sure to use the same language setting for this software Windows OS and the recorders that data is to be collected from On Models with the Math Function MT option Computation interval Same as the monitor interval of measurement tags Number of math tags 200 DAQSTATION CX1xxx CX1000 CX2xxx CX2000 DX1xxx DX1000 DX2xxx DX2000 DAQMASTER MV 1xxx MV1000 MV 2xxx MV2000 MX100 MW100 Same as left uR uR10000 uR20000 Same as left DARWIN DA100 DR130 DR230 Same as left DR240 SMARTDAC GX10 GX20 GP10 Same as left GP20 GM10 1 UTAdvanced UT32A UT35A UT52A UT55A UT75A Same as left UP35A UP55A UM33A DAQWORX DAQLOGGER DAQ32Plus Same as left MXLOGGER GateWT for GA10 GateWT for GA10 Devices supporting the Modbus protocol hardware 1 Supported in GA10 R2 01 01 2 Devices includi
201. le shutdown Resume Divide No operation such as a power failure or PC power cord disconnection Normal restart Shutdown by a user restart Resume version R2 02 xx Divide No operation due to Windows updating and Jand later the like Resuming is not possible on older versions of GA10 Monitoring and recording are not affected by logging off of the PC Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Q6 Q7 Q8 Q9 Q10 A communication error occurred between the client and server Will data collection continue A6 Because data collection is performed between the server and data collection devices the operation continues even when a communication error occurs between the client PC and server PC When a communication error occurs between the client PC and server PC the client logs out from the server The project that was open is closed In this situation if data collection was in progress and the project s Keep Lock State was set to ON the project will remain locked To control the project before the communication recovers perform either of the procedures below from a client on another PC using the same project e Open the project using the same user e Log in as an administrator On the Project menu click Unlock Project Forcibly to unlock the project Unable to control the project Why A7 Below are possible reasons e The user is not assigned privileges to control the project Open the project using a user who has privil
202. license Function for Using Collected Data The following options can be added to the GA10 Data collected from various devices can be printed as reports used in computations and connected to other systems for further use e Report Print function RP option e Math function MT option e OPC UA server function UA option IM 04L65B01 01EN 1 3 Chapter 1 Before Using the Product Connectable Devices and Software The following table lists the devices and software applications that GA10 can connect to Registering devices for connection gt page 3 2 Connectable devices and interfaces P page 3 15 Compatible Devices and Software Display When GA10 Is Connected Main GA10 Specifications Maximum number of simultaneous device connections 100 Maximum number of simultaneous client connections No limit operation guaranteed up to 32 clients Maximum number of r 30 simultaneous operation projects Maximum number of device 1000 registrations Maximum number of project 10000 registrations Maximum number of user 100 registrations Maximum number of clients that can run simultaneously on the same PC Monitor interval when set to PC time 1 100 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1 s 2s 5 s 10 s 20 s 30 s 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min Monitor interval when set to device time The acquisition interva
203. lick the downloaded file to extract the files 2 In the extracted folder right click Install_ x86 exe Install x64 exe for a 64 bit edition and click Run as administrator 3 If you accept the license agreement click Next The Customer Information dialog box appears Customer Information Please enter your information Please enter your name the name of the company for which you work and the Product serial number Leave serial number field blank to use in Trial Mode User Name Company Name License lt Back Next gt 4 Enter the user name company name and license number and then click Next Me WY If you do not enter the license number you can use GA10 as a trial version for 60 days e Continuous operation is possible for 60 days When the trial period expires the software will no longer run e During the trial period the maximum number of recording channels tags is 2200 2000 tags 200 math tags and all options can be used e Projects created with the trail version can only be passed on to products with 2000 device channels suffix code 20 and with all options e For the procedure to register a license after trial use see page 2 8 x hdd dssddsdcadcddddddddddaddaaddadddadadadddddddddadddadadadade 5 Continue to follow the instructions on the screen to install the software 6 When the installation is complete click Finish Check that SMARTDAC Data Logging Soft ware h
204. light Saving Time Be sure to set the same time zone and daylight saving time settings on the PC running the GA10 server the PC running the GA10 client and the data collection devices If they are not the same data time may not be displayed correctly 4 10 2Error Data If collected or recorded data is in error it is displayed or recorded using indications other than values For the different types of error data see Data that indicates errors e Data Display in a Digital Monitor Set or Meter Monitor Set Display Data Condition OVER OVER OVER OVER INVALID INVALID BURNOUT BURNOUT ILLEGAL ILLEGAL LACK LACK OFF OFF See Data that indicates errors e Display in the Trend Monitor Set Waveform Cursor Value Data Condition Drawn exceeding the OVER OVER scale upper limit Drawn exceeding the OVER OVER scale lower limit Nothing INVALID INVALID BURNOUT BURNOUT ILLEGAL ILLEGAL LACK LACK blank OFF See Data that indicates errors e Data in Recording Data Files Data in Binary Data Data in Excel Data Data Condition Files Files OVER OVER OVER OVER OVER OVER INVALID INVALID INVALID BURNOUT BURNOUT BURNOUT ILLEGAL ILLEGAL ILLEGAL LACK LACK LACK OFF OFF OFF See Data that indicates errors e Data That Indicates Errors The following table shows the diff
205. log event Clicking the icon shows the relevant page For example if you click the icon for a recording started event the corresponding project s Monitor Page will be displayed To close the log dialog box click the icon in the upper right 4 15 UOI DIIJOD eyeg Bunoyuow ss Bia eee Chapter 5 Managing Recording Data 5 1 Displaying a List of Data Files Click the Data files Page icon on the Project tab to display the Data File List Page e Showing Files in Link View You can link and display files that have been divided by the auto save function power failures or other means factors on the recorder Click the Show Files in Link View to turn the box blue Files are linked from the start of recording to the end of recording and displayed in one line Clicking the box again to turn it to white returns the page to the individual file display i File Edit View Project Operation User Help Data files Page icon Bice weebOox Re gt m mz n Data File List Show Files in Link View Folder C Users PubliciDocuments SMARTDAC Data Logging Software Data Project_1 pe 1y2fo1g A Project tab 0 EN we 5 1 1 Displayed Content The data files in the data file save destination directory are listed Only data files saved in binary format are displayed Data files saved in Excel format are excluded e Deleting Files 1 Click the file you want to delete 7 a o Selecting mul
206. lor Orange Displayed for Trend Graph Circular and Sheet Click the color to select the color from a Color Setting dialog box Print Quality Standard Displayed for Custom Print Report Output as well as Standard High when Graph Type is set to None for manual Custom Standard 300 dpi Print and manual Report Output High 600 dpi IM 04L65B01 01EN 3 63 Builpiooay pue UO DAIJOD ezeq Hulyieyg pue Hulsnbiyuoy Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording Sub Grid Range Trend Print Waveform Grid Range 1min None 30sec 10sec 5sec 2sec 1sec 2min None 1min 30sec 10sec 5sec 2sec 5min None 2min 1min 30sec 10sec 5sec 10min None 5min 2min 1min 30sec 10sec 20min None 10min 5min 2min 1min 30sec 30min None 10min 5min 2min 1min 30sec 1h None 30min 10min 5min 2min 1min 2h None 1h 30min 10min 5min 2min 3h None 1h 30min 10min 5min 2min 4h None 2h 1h 30min 10min 5min 6h None 3h 1h 30min 10min 5min 8h None 4h 2h 1h 30min 10min 12h None 6h 3h 1h 30min 10min 1day None 12h 6h 3h 1h 30min 7days None 1day 12h 6h 3h 1h 1month None 15days 10days 5days 1day 12h Sub Split Range Circular Split Circular Interval Range 1h None 2min 1min 30sec 10sec 5sec 2h None 5min 2min 1min 30sec 10sec 6h Nonec 10min 5min 2min 1min 30se 8h None 30min 10min 5min 2min 1min 12h None 30min 10min 5min 2min 1min 16h None 1h 30min 10min 5min 2
207. lpiooay pue UO DAIJOD ejyeg Hulyieyg pue Hulinbiyuoy Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording lt Value Register ALM Mask 0x0002 gt lt Alarm gt lt Alarm gt lt Type Register AL3 Trans SPAlarmType Table gt lt SetValue Register ALM3SP gt lt Value Register ALM Mask 0x0004 gt lt Alarm gt lt Alarm gt lt Type Register AL4 Trans SPAlarmType Table gt lt SetValue Register ALM4SP gt lt Value Register ALM Mask 0x0010 gt lt Alarm gt lt Alarms gt lt Channel gt lt Channel Name OUT1 DecimalPos 1 Min 0 0 Max 100 0 Unit gt OUT1 channel settings lt Value Register OUT 1 gt lt Alarms gt lt Alarm gt lt Type Register AL1 Trans OUTAlarmTypeTable gt A M1 R L1 SPNO PIDNO Run Stop channel settings lt SetValue Register ALM1SP gt lt Value Register ALM Mask 0x0001 gt lt Alarm gt lt Alarm gt lt Type Register AL2 Trans OUTAlarmType Table gt lt SetValue Register ALM2SP gt lt Value Register ALM Mask 0x0002 gt lt Alarm gt lt Alarm gt lt Type Register AL3 Trans OUTAlarmType Table gt lt SetValue Register ALM3SP gt lt Value Register ALM Mask 0x0004 gt lt Alarm gt lt Alarm gt lt Type Register AL4 Trans OUTAlarmType Table gt lt SetValue Register ALM4SP gt lt Value Register ALM Mask 0x0010 gt lt Alarm gt lt Alarms gt lt Channel gt lt Cha
208. lt End Time Standard Print Custom Print Report Output 3 70 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording IM 04L65B01 01EN When Condition Is Set to Everyday or When Report Type Is Set to Hourly Daily Below is the display example for Condition and Range when Condition is set to Everyday e Time span 2 days e Scale every 6 hours 0 00 6 00 12 00 18 00 0 00 6 00 12 00 18 00 0 00 Condition Every Hour Range a y Condition time 0 15 30 45 0 15 30 45 0 Start Time End time Item Default Selectable Range Value Condition Everyday Everyday Every Hour 00 00 00 Hour 00 to 23 Minute 00 to 59 Range Standard Prev Day Hour 00 to 23 e Start Time 0 00 00 or later of Prev Day Print 0 00 00 to Minute 00 to 59 End Time Up to the specified time of the condition Custom Print Current Second 00 to 59 The maximum time between start and end is 24 Day e hour 0 00 00 Start Time lt End Time Standard Print Custom Print Report Output Hourly Prev Day Same as above e Start Time Time of Prev Day Condition or later Daily Report 0 00 00 to e End Time Up to the time of Current Day condition Current e The maximum time between start and end is 24 Day e hour 00 00 00 Start Time lt End Time Standard Print Custom Print Report Output Not split even the time spans over two days Example Hourly Daily output data time Condition Everyday 01 30 00 Range Pr
209. lt Register Name AL3 FunctionCode 3 Address 40917 DataType INT16 gt lt Register Name AL4 FunctionCode 3 Address 40918 DataType INT16 gt lt Register Name ALM1SP FunctionCode 3 Address 40302 DataType INT16 gt lt Register Name ALM2SP FunctionCode 3 Address 40303 DataType INT16 gt lt Register Name ALM3SP FunctionCode 3 Address 40304 DataType INT16 gt lt Register Name ALM4SP FunctionCode 3 Address 40305 DataType INT16 gt lt Registers gt lt Channels gt PV1 channel settings lt Channel Name PV1 gt lt Init gt lt DecimalPos Register PDP1 gt Decimal place lt Min Register PV1Lower gt lt Max Register PV 1 Upper gt Maximum and minimum values lt Unit Register PUNI1 Trans PVUnitTable gt Unit converted using PV Unit Table described later lt Init gt PV1 basic information 3 46 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording lt Value Register PV1 gt lt DataError Register ERROR1 Mask 0x0005 gt Error lt PlusOver Register ERROR1 Mask 0x0010 gt z over over lt MinusOver Register ERROR1 Mask 0x0020 gt PV1 values lt Burnout gt lt gt Type Register BSL Burnout 1 Masked because the parameter lt Value Register ERROR1 Mask 0x0100 gt contains multiple pieces of information lt Burnout gt lt Value gt lt Alarms gt lt Alarm gt First alarm up to fou
210. me unselected The item will not be pasted You can also copy and paste selected content using the Edit menu To select the range of setup data follow one of the methods below e Select by dragging Click the first line you want to select Drag to the last line you want to select and release the mouse button e Select using the Shift key After selecting the first line you want to select hold down the Shift key and click the last line you want to select e Select all lines Click the title area of the Monitor column to select all setup data Collective Editing 1 Select the rows that you want to edit collectively 1 Click the left edge of the first row Monitor Device Channel Tag No Tag Comment Type Dec Point m0001 001 Device SHORT 4 001 Device Ww 0002 SHORT 4 2 001 Device 0003 SHORT 4 001 Device 0004 SHORT 4 02 001 Device 9 0005 SHORT amp 4 001 Device 0006 SHORT 4 001 Device SHORT 4 001 Device 0008 SHORT 4 001 Device 0009 SHORT 4 001 Device 0010 SHORT 4 o 01 002 Device amp SHORT 1 002 Device SHORT 3 i 002Device SHORT 4 amp 002 Device SHORT 2 W 002Device SHORT 4 2 Drag and release 2 Click an icon at the bottom for the column that you want to edit The values in
211. min 1day None 1h 30min 10min 5min 2min 2days None 2h 1h 30min 10min 5min 1week None 12h 6h 3h 1h 30min 2weeks None 12h 6h 3h 1h 30min 4weeks None 12h 6h 3h 1h 30min 9 Printer Setup e Printer Displays a list of registered printers Select the printer on the server side to perform printing Network printers are not displayed Select a local printer registered on the server PC e Paper size Displays a list of paper sizes retrieved from the specified printer Use paper whose size is between A4 and A3 e Orientation Set to Portrait or Landscape 10 Output Language Specify the language for the printed materials The date format and decimal point format vary depending on the language e Default value Language of each user the registered language if a schedule registered on the server has already been displayed e Options Japanese English Chinese German French Korean Russian Language vs Date Format and Decimal Point Format Output Language Date Format Decimal Point Format Japanese YY MM DD Point English MM DD YY Point German DD MM YY Comma French DD MM YY Comma Russian DD MM YY Comma Chinese YY MM DD Point Korean YY MM DD Point 3 64 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 6 4 Custom Print If you set Task to Custom Print the schedule page shows the Custom Print settings In custom print the specified content is
212. msec Outputs the millisecond as a text string The millisecond format is msec The millisecond is expressed using a number between 000 and 999 Data no Outputs the data number as a number number The data number starts with zero Value tagxxxx Outputs the tag value as a number The value is displayed using the number of decimal places for tags that is specified on the Tag Setting Page Xxxx is the tag index number Example in Which Excel Is Used as a DDE Client Create a link to Excel for using DDE in advance 1 In an Excel sheet enter the indexes for the data you want to retrieve Enter the index item name o o e a a a Il 10 tag0018 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 2 In the cells you want to display data column B in this example enter the link expressions A B 1 2 Date DLGDDE test Date 3 Time DLGDDE test Time 4 msec DLGDDE test msec 5 No DLGDDE test No 6 tag0004 DLGDDE test tag0004 7 tag0015 DLGDDE test tag0015 8 tag0016 DLGDDE test tag0016 8 tag0017 DLGDDE test tag0017 10 tag0018 DLGDDE test tag0018 Example DLGDDE project Date application name topic namelitem name e The pipe symbol and exclamation point are delimiters that are necessary in expressions e For details on the application name topic name and item name see the table on the previous page e
213. n set the data time acquisition condition on the Acquisition amp Monitor Page to PC time LM sssidddddddddccddddddddadddddaddddddaadaddddddaaddddddddddadddadddddddddddddddaddddaddddaddddddadddddddadddddddddddda Basic Operation 1 Select Math Tag in the navigation area on the left of the window Math Tag appears when the license for the Math function MT option is already registered Math Tag peee record Expression pec point fosd H A0001 A0002 A0003 A0004 A0005 A0006 A0007 A0008 A0009 A0010 A0011 A0012 A0013 A0014 A0015 A0016 A0017 A0018 A0019 A0020 A0021 A0022 A0023 A0024 A0025 A0026 A0027 A0028 A0029 A0030 A0031 A0032 A0033 A0034 A0035 ANNIE G v v v b S lt TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TAG 0001 TaAcimnns eye eQOOODOODOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOoOoOoOooo a D 0 ES fll 2 PNNNNMNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN ND ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee a a eS oooooocococceceoccccec ecco cece ccc cc cece cece ccc c ecco Scroll to show the Unit Tag No Tag Comment and Alarm items
214. n contained in tables diagrams Picture Color images and other objects This information is useful for people an with vision or cognitive impairments who may not be able to see or Artistic Effects understand the object Crop A title can be read to a person with a disability and is used to determine whether they wish to hear the description of the content 1 I 1 i E m wi a r E a a m m r E b m E m E Size Properties Text Box SPH ECEETOR eT a a be el La da G Tertare ee ee o g o ija Right click on the picture e Special Keywords Keyword Meaning Display Format Repeat Specifies the output location of the data that corresponds The same as the the report data keyword and the Index keyword a corresponding keyword special keyword Copy Outputs all data that corresponds the report data The same as the keyword and the Index keyword a special keyword corresponding keyword This keyword is valid for PDF and printer output Index Outputs serial numbers from the value specified by Number start to the value specified by end App 4 IM 04L51B01 01EN Appendix 1 Creating Report Templates IM 04L51B01 01EN Parameters Parameter Name Format Range Description Remarks Report channel number Rxxx RO1 R100 The software s report channel Report Kind Ho
215. n or later 0 00 00 to and Current End Time Up to the time the Condition is met Current Cycle Cycle e The maximum time between start and end is 1 cycle 0 00 00 e Start Time lt End Time Standard Print Custom Print Report Start Time Output Hour 0 to 3 5 7 11 23 interval 1 hour Minute 00 to 59 Second 00 to 59 End Time Hour 0 to 4 6 8 12 24 Minute 00 to 59 Second 00 to 59 When Report Type Is Set to Batch If Report Output is set to Batch you do not need to set Condition The graph range is the entire duration the following figure and a time table is not displayed Range Start Time Start of Recording End Time End of Recording If Condition Is Set to Recording is finished If Condition is set to Recording is finished the range is fixed to the entire duration A time table is not displayed Recording is finished te Start Time Start of Recording End Time End of Recording 3 74 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording IM 04L65B01 01EN UZOR Graphs are created on the basis of the End Time of Range As such if the device time is changed the start time of the graph may differ from the start time of the range CLA UZO O The following limitations apply to DST Daylight Saving Time If the time for Condition or Range is set to a time that does not exist in DST Daylight Saving Time it is executed at the time DST takes effect Example If the
216. n the communication path to the server E3005 The user name already exists the user can not be A user with the same name is already registered Check the user registed name and register with a different name E3006 The password is incorrect The password that you entered for changing the password is incorrect Check the current password and re enter it E3007 Please enter at least four characters for the password Enter 4 to 30 characters for the password The new password and the comfirmed password does Enter the new password and confirmation password so that they not match match E3009 You can not delete the logged user Delete the user after the relevant user logs out Users to change is logged into the server The basic information can not be changed User to be initialized is logged in to the server user E3008 E3010 Modify the basic information after the relevant user logs out E3011 egy Initialize the user after the relevant user logs out can not be initialized E3012 Lemax number 9 logine Nas peen TEACHES Mie Delete registered users first and then register additional users user can not log in O E3013 Since the Project name you entered already exists the A project with the same name is already registered Check the project gt project can not be created name and register with a different name D E3014 Since the Project name you entered already exists A project with the same name is already being used Check the
217. nd end number can be omitted The decimal point type dot or comma depends on whether the converted data is a value or character string Whether the converted data is a value or character string depends on the format of the cell that the keyword is written in When the cell format is numerical the decimal point type is determined by the cell format When the cell format is text the decimal point type matches the format of the report data Valid only when the report type is Batch The item becomes a character string in PDF and printer output App 3 Appendix 1 Creating Report Templates e Report Graph Keywords Keyword Meaning Display Format Example ExtGraph Report graph Image ExtGraph G1 Range G1 to G4 1 The parameter is the graph number it cannot be omitted Inserting a Graph To insert a graph in a report template for Excel report files follow the procedure below 1 Insert a graph image file at the appropriate location in the created Excel template 2 Right click the graph and select Format Picture 3 From the menu on the left select Alt Text 4 In the Title box under Alt Text type the above key word ExtGraph G1 Format Picture Fill Alt Text Line Color Title Line Style ExtGraph G 1 Shadow Description Reflection Glow and Soft Edges 3 D Format 3 D Rotation Picture Corrections Titles and descriptions provide alternative text based representations of the informatio
218. ndex In Detail Settings mode tags exceeding the server s tag range are not displayed Mt Not displayed i tags are set T None If both the start tag and end tag are math tags Start Condition is set to Immediate and Stop Condition is set to Continuous If the start tag is a measurement tag and the end tag is a math tag the range is set to the server s maximum Tag Index Math tags are set to Not displayed None If both the start tag and end tag are math tags mail is set to OFF and the start and end tags in the selected range are set to the server s maximum Tag Index In Detail Settings mode math tags are not displayed If both the start tag and end tag are math tags the inclusion of Alarm Information and Instantaneous Value is set to OFF In Detail Settings mode math tags are not displayed Me WY When you import a project you become the project owner Owner gt page 3 38 To modify the owner gt page 6 4 CUA IM 04L65B01 01EN Buipsosay pue uona gq Bunes pue Bunnpyuog n Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording Copying and Pasting You can easily copy and paste projects 1 From the list of projects select the project that you want to copy 2 On the Edit menu click Copy or press Ctrl c on the keyboard The project is copied 3 To paste the copied project on the Edit menu click Paste or press Ctrl v on the keyboard
219. nding Dates and Times Use the start date and time and end date and time to specify the parts of the report file s report data that you will output to the file that you create with the template You can specify the starting and ending dates for daily reports or times for hourly reports Report Kind Start Date and Time End Date and Time Hour Start time hour End time hour Day Start time day End time day Batch Start time minute End time minute Day custom Start time hour minute End time hour minute Example when the report type is hourly and the report is created at 18 00 ReportDataSum Hour R001 20 22 ReportDataSum Hour R001 16 19 Report 18 00 19 00 20 00 21 00 22 00 16 00 17 00 18 00 19 00 time CTD T T T ONTT Report file 1 Keyword ReportDataSum Hour R001 20 22 From the hourly data from 19 00 01 to 22 00 00 the report data sums of report channel R001 for 20 00 21 00 and 22 00 is output Keyword ReportDataSum Hour R001 16 19 From the hourly data from 15 00 01 to 19 00 00 the report data sums of report channel R001 for 16 00 17 00 and 18 00 is output Because the report data for 19 00 is in another report file it is not output Keyword ReportDataSum Hour R001 One file s worth 18 00 01 to 18 00 00 of data from report channel R001 is output starting from 19 00 When you omit the start and end times for an hourly report the dat
220. nformation after the period ends see the following sections Entering a License Number during the Trial Period or Entering a License Number after the Trial Period IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 2 Preparation 2 3 Logging In 1 On the Start menu click All Programs SMARTDAC Data Logging Software and Data Logging Software l A Login dialog box appears 2 For the first login enter the following information Leave the password blank User name admin Password blank localhost Cancel To change the port number gt page 2 7 3 Click OK The dialog box closes the initial Project List Page appears Tn To continue with the procedure proceed to the next section To log out on the File menu click Logout IM 04L65B01 01EN Mle WE You can change the background color from the two available colors by using Style in the View menu The following figure shows the dark style window The windows shown in all other figures of this manual is light Setting general display options gt page 4 2 iid ddd dddddciddddddcdadadddddddaddadddddadddddddddaddddddde uoljelieddig Chapter 2 Preparation 2 4 Registering the Administrator Password After installation first set the administrator admin password The administrator can register and delete other users and initialize their passwords 1 In the window shown in step 9 of section 2 2 click Change I
221. nformation on the User menu Date File Edit View Project Operation User Help Bt oe mh amp A a aa _ToProject Page The Change User s Information dialog box appears 2 Enter the new password for the administrator and click OK Enter the password using 4 to 30 alphanumeric characters Change User s Information User Name User Full Name New Password Den nn co cece ch ch Confirm New Password Dn co ca coc co ch Cancel j The Change User s Information dialog box closes The new administrator password has been set A IMPORTANT After registering their passwords users will need to enter the passwords to log in to the server If the administrator cannot log in administrator privileges cannot be used Make a note of the administrator password and do not lose it 2 5 Registering Users After registering the administrator register users as necessary The administrator registers users 1 Start the client and enter the administrator password that you set earlier to log in 2 On the View menu click User Management Page Or click the icon The User Management Page appears 3 On the User menu click Register New User ew File Edit View Project Operation User Help Hs oe wh amp amp l a Jo S i ie Te Project Page The Change User s Information dialog box appears Type the user name and user full name
222. ng YOKOGAWA control instruments defined using Modbus device definition files IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 1 Before Using the Product 1 2 MODEL and SUFFIX Codes e Basic Software Data Logging Software Model Suffix Code Optional Code Name GA10 Data Logging Software license Channels 01 100ch 02 200ch 05 500ch 10 1000ch 20 2000ch Options RP Report Print function IMT Math function IUA OPC UA server function e Additional Channels or Data Logging Software Functions Upgrade license Model Suffix Code Name GA10UP Upgrade license for GA10 Upgrade Channel upgrade 01 100ch 200ch 200ch 500ch 500ch 1000ch 1000ch 2000ch Channel upgrade 02 100ch 500ch 200ch 1000ch 500ch 2000ch 03 Channel upgrade 100ch 1000ch 200ch 2000ch 04 Channel upgrade 100ch 2000ch RP Report Print function MT Math function UA OPC UA server function e Additional Monitoring PCs Clients Data Logging Software Client license Model Suffix Code Name GA10CL Client license for GA10 Number of 01 1 license licenses 05 5 licenses 10 10 licenses 50 50 licenses e How the software is provided Name Description License sheet Contains the license keys Check that the correct number of licenses are present GA10 Data Logging Software Downloading the Latest Software and Manuals 1 sheet A4 size IM 04L65B01 01EN 1
223. ng report templates in PDF format You can download Report Template Builder from the following URL www smartdacplus com software en Keywords specify the type of data that will be entered into a cell Entering keywords makes it possible to print the information gt Keyword Definitions On the template file registration area you can use the control buttons in the upper right to register to a PC save and delete template files 1 2 a ee ee Ri Template File Upload Download l Delete File Name 01 RepTempSample_B_ DataTime tpl PrinvPDF 11 RepTempSample_B_ ElapsedTime tpl PrinvPDF 12 03 13 04 f 14 05 15 06 t 16 07 i 17 08 18 09 tere 19 10 i 20 1 Click the No cell for the File Name that you want to perform the action on To register select a row showing Unregistered The selected row turns blue You cannot select multiple rows 2 Click a control button Clicking Upload displays a standard Open dialog box Clicking Download displays a standard Save As dialog box Clicking Delete deletes the file registered in the GA10 server 3 If you click Upload select the file you want to register and click OK If you click Download select the save destination and click OK The file will be registered or saved ZTO O O e If you place the SMARTDAC Report Template Builder installer in the same folder as the GA10 installer Report Tem
224. ng request CSR A Issue a certificate signing request CSR dialog box appears S 2 Enter the items up to File Name The character input range is as follows e Country 2 alphabet characters e File Name Up to 60 characters excluding V lt gt e State City Alphanumeric characters spaces and symbols Up to 128 characters Prohibited characters 8 amp e Organization Organization Unit Common Name E Mail address Alphanumeric characters spaces and symbols Up to 64 characters Prohibited characters 8 amp 3 Click Browse to specify the save destination folder The Browse for Folder dialog box appears Browse for Folder Lah BE Desktop a Ga Network SS Libraries E Recyde Bin A Control Panel 4 gt Computer amp Local Disk C gt DVD RW Drive 0 gt a Capture di check_temp S o came k The character input range is as follows e Up to 255 characters Prohibited characters lt gt 4 Click OK A certificate signing request CSR is created in the specified folder The file name extension is CST If creation fails an error E3067 will appear The following table shows the items and descriptions of the certificate signing request CSR that is created Item Name Description Country Setting entered in the dialog box State Same as above City Same as above Organization Same as above IM 04L65B01
225. nnel Name A M1 DecimalPos 0 Min 0 Max 1 gt lt Value Register MOD1 Mask 0x0001 gt lt Channel gt lt Channel Name R L1 DecimalPos 0 Min 0 Max 1 option remote gt lt Value Register MOD1 Mask 0x0002 gt lt Channel gt lt Channel Name SPNO DecimalPos 0 Min 0 Max 8 gt lt Value Register SPNO gt lt Channel gt lt Channel Name PIDNO1 DecimalPos 0 Min 0 Max 8 gt lt Value Register PIDNO1 gt 3 48 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording lt Channel gt lt Channel Name Run Stop DecimalPos 0 Min 0 Max 1 gt lt Value Register MOD1 Mask 0x0004 gt lt Channel gt lt Channels gt lt Trans Tables gt Parameter values specified as Trans PVUnitTable are converted into specific units and used as channel information lt Table Name PVUnitTable ToDataType String gt lt Value From 0 To gt If the value is 0 the unit is displayed as lt Value From 1 To 4C gt lt Value From 2 To gt lt Value From 5 To 4F gt lt Table gt Parameter values specified as Trans PVAlarmTypeTable are converted into alarm types lt Table Name PVAlarmType Table ToDataType String gt lt Value From 0 To OFE gt If the value is 0 the alarm type is displayed as OFF lt Value From 1 To H gt lt Value From 2 To L gt lt Value From 9 To H gt lt Value From 10 To L gt lt
226. not changed and channel information are reflected in the Tag Setting Page and Display Group Setting Page M1016 OK to update the selected device s channel This message asks whether you want to update the device channel information Updated tag information will appear in information If you click OK GA10 will access the selected device the tag settings screen retrieve its channel information and reflect the information on the Tag Sting Page M1017 Update the selected tag information This confirmation message appears when on the Tag Setting Page you click Refresh on the View menu Click OK to update the tag information M1018 Schedule re executed successfully The re execution of the specified schedule is complete M1019 Print completed successfully wenn M1020 Generating a report completed successfully M1021 OK to execute sorting of tags in order of the device If you click OK tags are sorted by device number If you select number Resetting is needed in Math tags Cancel tags are not sorted IM 04L65B01 01EN 8 1 Buljooyusajqnoiy Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Warning Messages Code Message Description and Solution W2001 Do you want to delete this user s This message asks whether you want to delete the registered user xxx indicates the name of the user that will be deleted W2002 Do you want to delete this device s This message asks whether you want to delete the device from the Devices List on the Device S
227. ns blue when selected 3 Double click the selected user The Change User s Information dialog box opens 4 To change the full name type the new name To initialize the password click Initialize Type in this box to change the full name Change User s Information User Name User Full Name Password Initialize OK Cancel Click here to initialize the password 5 Check the information and click OK The full name or password will be changed 0 We You cannot change the information if the applicable user is logged in or if the user has been deleted from another client OLUA IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 6 Managing Users 6 3 2 How Users Change Their Information The following example shows how the administrator or a user changes his or her full name and password 1 Start the client and log in to the server The Project List Page appears Dat File Edit View Project Operation User Hel p CERSKA LEE On the User menu click Change Information The Change User s Information dialog box opens 3 Change the full name or password view the changes and click OK To change the password type the current and new passwords Change User s Information User Name User Full Name Password New Password Confirm New Password l Cancel ZOOO OOOO TTA e You can change the full name and password simultaneously e Enter th
228. number of decimal places e Default value 2 5 Span Enter the minimum and maximum values of the span e Default value 100 00 minimum value 100 00 maximum value e Input range 3 4028235E 38 to 3 4028235E 38 Constants are detailed later Alarm 1 a lt D aD Tag nnna penn ume Tagno Tag comment Dpe Vawet iy TagA0001 TagCommentA0001 Off 0 00 0 00 TagA0002 TagCommentA0002 Off Ww 0 00 0 00 TagA0003 TagCommentA0003 Off Ww 0 00 0 00 TagA0004 TagCommentA0004 Off Ww 0 00 0 00 TagA0005 TagCommentA0005 Off w 0 00 0 00 TagA0006 TagCommentA0006 Off w 0 00 0 00 TagA0007 TagCommentA0007 Off v 0 00 0 00 TagA0008 TagCommentA0008 Off w 0 00 0 00 Alarms 2 to 4 6 Unit Enter the unit e Default value Blank e Input range Enter up to 6 characters IM 04L65B01 01EN 3 51 Builpiooay pue UO DAIJOD ejyeg Hulyieyg pue Hulinbyuoy Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 7 Tag No Enter the tag number e Default value TagA0001 to TagA0200 e Input range Enter up to 16 characters 8 Tag Comment Enter the tag comment e Default value TagCommentA0001 to TagCommentA0200 e Input range Enter up to 32 characters 9 Alarm 1 to 4 Type Select the alarm type from the list e Default value Off e Selectable range Off High high limit alarm Low low limit alarm rHigh high limit on rate of change alarm rLow low limit on rate of change alarm Fo
229. o channels of connected devices for identification After registering devices in a project when you open the Tag Setting Page for the first time the channels of registered devices are assigned automatically to the tags as default values You can edit them to customize the data collection Data Logging Software admin Project B1 om File Edit Vie Project Operatipn User Help Hs AZ wh wee OC x Jo F E Good Monitor Record Channel Tag No Tag Co Type Dec Point d 0001 001 Device MC 0001 J VI001 LONG 4 oS OOTDevice Ct 0002 _ VI002 DUT Device E oispiay 001 Device amp 001 Device R i 001 Device amp 3 001 Device 001 Device 3 Dq E Mail 001 Device 001 Device amp 001 Device 001 Device 001 Device 001 Device 001 Device 001 Device 001 Device 001 Device amp xD 0 aN R raroa g 001 Device 001 Device 001 Device 001 Device G 001 Device 001 Device amp 001 Device 001 Device 001 Device 001 Device 001 Device 001 Device amp 001 Device 001 Device 001 Device 001 Device 001 Device 001 Device OHHHHHHHHHOHHHHHHOHHHHHHHHHHHOWE ISOC CCC CC CCC CCC NCCC CC a m Basic Operation 1 Select Tag in the navigation area on the left of the window The Tag Setting Page appears 2 Select a tag to use in data collection or re
230. o _ O Local 12hours File Name Select the template file to apply to printing To use a template registered in GA10 click Server To use a template from a PC click Local 8 Click Browse and select the template The procedure for selecting the template is the same as step 5 in Custom Print on page 5 3 9 Set the File Name Output Folder Output Printer and Output Language items 10 Set the report channel 11 Set the Print Type Range Group and Printout Setup items on the Graph 1 to 4 tabs 12 Click oK Printing will be executed Data File Displays the data file name of the print target line selected in the list If the entire file name cannot be displayed the end is abbreviated with ellipses Type Select the report type from Hourly Daily Daily Weekly Daily Monthly Batch and Daily custom Condition The condition varies depending on the report type For details see Schedule Conditions and Range on page 3 70 Save Interval Hidden on the initial page because the report type is Hourly Daily This appears only when the report type is Batch or Daily custom Set the data recording interval e Default value 10min e Options 1min 2min 3min 4min 5min 10min 15min 30min 1hour 5 6 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 5 Managing Recording Data Template File Displays the name of template file selected from the server or the local PC If the entire file name canno
231. o be collected data to be recorded the monitor page layout and the like are specified Multiple projects can be created in a single server Monitoring Collected data can be monitored on the Monitor Page On the Monitor Page you can arrange four types of displays trend digital meter and alarm in an easy to view layout In addition related data can be displayed in groups to monitor measurements efficiently In the trend display you can refer to past data 0002 H L H L 0003 0004 H H L L 0005 0006 H 0007 0008 ji I 18 02 00 18 03 00 18 05 00 18 06 00 18 07 2013712703 ne aon rime h m s Amin di H Adi User Management GA10 users can be registered and managed There are two user levels administrator and user Administrators are responsible for registering and deleting all users Users enter their IDs and passwords to access a server Of the users registered in a server only those that have been granted privileges can access projects The operation scope of each user can be managed by assigning one of four levels owner manager operator and monitor If a user is accessing a project other users cannot access that project Administrator Register and delete users 2 A A Client Client Client 3s e Server access privileges Project operation privileges Monitoring Data collection and recording IM 04L65B01 01
232. o register templates see the next page 4 Start recording 4 The report is output or printed according to the schedule Me ZTO O e You can view the schedule and history of report schedules that have been set on the Status Page Viewing report schedules P page 4 12 e The results of auto report printing is displayed in the project log of the Log dialog box A log entry is sent when printing completes successfully or unsuccessfully Opening the Log dialog box page 4 15 e All unexecuted report schedules of the relevant project registered in the server are executed after the last recording file is created upon the completion of a recording Ld idddddddddddacddddddddddddddddadddddaadddddddadddddddddddddddadddddddddddddddaddddaddddaddddddadddddddddddddddddaddda 3 60 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 6 2 Registering Template Files Before performing a custom print or report print register template files The area for registering template files is in a two column tabular form You can register up to 20 report template files in the following format Template Files That You Can Use Template File Save Format Extension Remarks Excel format xISx A template created by entering keywords and text of your choice in Excel cells Excel macro enabled format xlsm Same as above PDF format tpl Created using the SMARTDAC Report Template Builder a tool for creating and viewi
233. o the size e For an alarm list and mark list the number of output lines is calculated from the vertical length and font size and data is printed over the calculated output lines in order from the latest time e Set the width of the alarm list to at least 102 mm and that of the mark list to at least 196 mm Otherwise character strings that do not fit width wise will be cut and not be output Lid idddddddccddddddddddddddaaddddddadddddddaaddddddddddddddacdadddddddaddddddddddddddddaddddddaddaddddddddddddddadddda IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 6 5 Report Output If you set Task to Report Output the schedule page shows the Report Output settings In Report Output report files PDF Excel are created according to the specified template Report files are output only when a template is specified Be sure to register a template in advance Registering Template Files on page 3 61 Name Task Type Condition Filename Naming Rule Output Folder Template File Ouput Printer Output Language Report channel 1 Name Report 01 O None Standard Print Custom Print Report Output Hourly Daily CO Auto w o0 00 00 O Specify Data Folder CAUsers PublicIDocuments SMARTDAC Data Logging Software Data pr None No ww English Graph 1 Print Type Range Group Printout Setup Olsec Ols
234. of the project they apply in the same way to the administrator and users There are four types of project access privileges Owner Manager Operator and Monitor Only the owner can assign access privileges The person creating the project is the initial owner of the project To change owners page 6 4 Administrator A 2 User B User C Owner manager operator All operations Edit Operation Monitor Operation Monitor Monitor Project A Privileges are assigned on the Access amp Others Setting Page of the project From the users registered in the server you can specify the users that can access the current project and their operation scope Click here to display the Access amp Others Setting Page Access user list Data Logging Software admin Project B1 File Edit View Project Operation User Help E 3 Ael ie ee amp amp OXIE gt Aco Sp Device v 7 g I S Tag v 2 User4 S a Poser v i wort v M4 Dq E Mail v E ia Access amp Others E f x User List 2 User2 2 User3 2 User6 2 User7 s User8 All Users e I Users registered in the server Server user list Keep Lock State O ON OFF DDE Server O ON OFF Other settings Keep Lock State DDE Server ARERR RHERERUEDE RES RRERERTERERTERSERETEER 3 38 IM 04L65B01 01EN Cha
235. oject Owner Data recording in progress Es Project You can check the alarm status and alarm ACK status for the opened project When an alarm is not occurring When an alarm is occurring indicated in red Related topic If communication with a data acquisition device is disconnected you can check which projects are affected a Normal device connection EA Projecta displayed with a green icon Owner admin admin Locking _ Disconnected device connection ES Project_a HES Project displayed with a red icon Owner admin admin Locking Related topic gt 4 1 UOI DIIJOD eJeg Bunoyuow Chapter 4 Monitoring Data Collection 4 1 2 Displaying the Monitor Page Open a project and click the Monitor Page icon on the Project tab to open the Monitor Page In Simple Settings mode the Monitor Page consists of the Trend Monitor Set and Digital Monitor Set as shown below Monitor set boundary Monitor sets Maximize icon In Detail Settings mode the Monitor Page that you configured opens File Edit View Project Operation User Help Bt oi aa Bw jes Markt Group 0 Grou 04 Group 0S Grou Group 0 up 03 Group 04 Group 0S Group 06 Q Tag 0001 Tag 002 10443 me 0 5680 Tag 0003
236. ollecting Projecti A K002 a Project1 admin excutes recording Projecti AK003 z Project1 Project1 s recording started AKO00S z Project1 Project1 s recording started AK005 1118 15 58 13 1148 15 59 20 Log list Most recent log entry e Filter The events that correspond to the filter box that you clicked and turned blue appear For details see Transmission scope e Log List The log events are displayed in the order of occurrence If there are events that do not fit in the dialog box a scroll bar appears Transmission date and time Transmission scope Source Sent information 1118 15 58 13 Project admin excutes collecting Project WvkKO01 A T Jump icon Log number e Most Recent Log Entry This line always displays the most recent log entry e Transmission Date and Time The date and time when the log was transmitted IM 04L65B01 01EN e Transmission Scope Indicates the log transmission scope Icon Description Sent to all users system log A Set the Filter to Log to display the corresponding log Sent to users that that have the relevant projects opened project log Set the Filter to project to display the corresponding log e Source SYS or the project name e Sent Information The log information e Log Number Displays the number that corresponds to the log event e Jump Icon Displayed when there is a page associated with the
237. olm Sweden All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE IM 04L65B01 01EN Using Open
238. omm Kind Ethernet network gt set to Serial and 3 The communication port can be specified on the GX GP but GA10 only Device PAIS GAI GX20 GP10 GP20 supports the default value 34434 or GM10 4 Aport number must be specified as a parameter when the interface is User ID Same as above Blank You need to enter specified The port numbers in the table are default values this if the security settings on the device being registered are Password Same as above Blank enabled Otherwise leave the user name admin user ID and password blank and click OK IM 04L65B01 01EN 3 11 Buipsosay pue uona gq Buljels pue BulinByu05 2 Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording Representative examples for different interfaces and connected devices are provided below DAQLOGGER DAQ32Plus MKLOGGER GateWT e Comm Kind is fixed to Ethernet e Enter the IP address of the PC in which the software specified with Device Type is installed e To connect to DAQLOGGER or DAQ32Plus leave the System No at zero default value e To connect to MKLOGGER select the System No that is being used in MKLOGGER Register device x Deivce Name Device Deivce Type Comm Kind Ethe t Host Name IP Address Port No System No Item Name How to Specify Default Value Description 6 Port No Enter text See This appears when Input range Connectable Comm Kind is
239. on Status Startup Type LogOnAs ActiveX Installer Provides Us Manual Local Syste i Adaptive Brightness Monitors a Manual Local Service Gk Adobe Acrobat U Adobe Acro Started Automatic Local Syste Gh Adobe Flash Playe a Manual Local Syste Application Experi Processes a Started Manual Local Syste o Application Identity Determines Manual Local Service a Application Infor Facilitates t Started Manual Local Syste Gh Application Layer Provides su Manual Local Service a Application Mana Processes in Manual Local Syste o Background Intelli Transfers fil Started Automatic D Local Syste Base Filtering Engi The Base Fil Started Automatic Local Service BitLocker Drive En BDESVC hos Manual Local Syste Block Level Backu The WBENG Manual Local Syste Bluetooth Support The Bluetoo Manual Local Service e BranchCache This service Manual Network S Certificate Propag Copies user Manual Local Syste Z CNG Key Isolation The CNG ke Manual Local Syste COM Event Syst Supports Sy Started Automatic Local Service Sh COM System Ap Manages th Manual Local Syste amp Computer Browser Maintains a Started Manual Local Syste _ m j gt In the Services window choose DLGServer To stop the server on the Action menu click Stop The status turns blank ae Sh Servic
240. onitor mode The right end of the waveform is the most recent data e Viewing Past Data playback mode Move the time axis scroll bar from the right end to view past data This mode is called playback mode Automatic updating of the data display stops Returning the scroll bar to the right end switches GA10 back to monitor mode If you do not operate the scroll bar for 30 minutes GA10 will return to monitor mode When Collecting Data Using Device Time The window is divided by a combination of device and scan interval Trends of up to four devices can be displayed at each scan interval 4 2 2 Changing the Display You can change the display using the icons in the upper right Show or hide the legend Zoom in on or out of the time axis Y axis display zone Waveform line thickness Grid density Waveform display limit Els aji wy Bo Shae 6 ms e Show or Hide the Legend You can show or hide the legend e Zoom in on or out of the Time Axis You can zoom in on or out of the time axis UOI DIIJOD ejeg Bunoyuow Chapter 4 Monitoring Data Collection Y axis Display Zone You can switch the Y axis display zone section 4 2 3 Waveform Line Thickness You can change the waveform line thickness This applies to all waveforms Grid Density You can change the grid density Waveform Display Limit WEP T T T T T 14 30 00 1 00 With limit
241. ou want to completely remove the selected application and all of its features ve ne Uninstallation begins Uninstall Complete InstallShield Wizard has finished uninstalling SMARTDAC Data Logging Software Server Installshield W lt Back Finish P Uninstallation is complete when the progress bar disappears Note amu On Windows 8 click Settings Control Panel and Programs and Features OLLI ddd sssscccccccccccccddddddddddde IM 04L65B01 01EN 2 11 uoljelieddig ss Bia eee Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 1 What Are Simple Settings and Detail Settings In GA10 you need to configure various project settings before beginning data collection and recording There are two modes to configure these settings Simple Settings and Detail Settings In Simple Settings mode you only have to specify the device to connect to data collection and recording interval and data file save destination in a single window to begin data collection and recording In Detail Settings mode you can configure settings in detail to customize data collection monitoring and recording Detail Settings mode consists of the following seven Setting Pages that you switch between to configure the settings e Device Setting Page e Tag Setting Page e Display Group Setting Page e Collection amp Monitor Page e Record Setting Page e Email Setting Page e Access amp Others Setting Page
242. plate Builder will be installed automatically when you install GA10 e For information on how to use SMARTDAC Report Template Builder see the Help menu of Report Template Builder e For instructions on how to create report templates for Excel report files and examples of how to write keywords see Creating Report Templates on page App 1 LL sbiddddddddaddddddddaddddddddadddddaadddddddadddddddddddddddadddddddddddddddaddddaddddaddddddaddaddddddddddddddadddda IM 04L65B01 01EN 3 61 Bulpiooay pue UO DAIJOD ejyeg Hulyieysg pue Hulsnbiyuoy Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 6 3 Standard Print If you set Task to Standard Print the schedule page shows the Standard Print settings In standard print the specified content is printed automatically from a data file at the specified time 1 Name 2 Task O None Standard Print Custom Print Report Output G Condition Everyday amp 00 Range Start Time Prv Day o0 00 End Time Current Day amp Loo Coo Coo DOO O OTO TO T y 0 00 6 00 12 00 18 00 i 6 00 12 00 18 00 5 Print Type Trend Graph Group 7 Print Header Printout Setup Print Graph Format 1 page Multiple Pages Line Thick 4 0pt Tag Display Form Tag No Y Axis Column Num ae Legend O Yes No Color Mode Black White Color Mark Color 9 Printer Paper Size
243. printed automatically from a data file according to a template at the specified time Auto print is performed only when a template is specified Be sure to register a template in advance Registering Template Files on page 3 61 Q Report 01 2 O None Standard Print Custom Print Report Output 3 Everyday Loo Loo 00 4 Template File None Printer Output Language Graph OneNote 2010 73 English Graph 1 Print Type Range Group Printout Setup In a Custom Print schedule set the following items 1 Name Trend Graph i Start Time Prev Day End Time Current Day Range 0 00 6 00 12 00 18 00 0 00 6 00 Group 01 Line Thick Tag Display Form Y Axis Column Num Legend Color Mode Mark Color Print Quality 1 0pt Tag No O Yes O Black White Standard 18 00 0 00 No Color O High Enter the name of the schedule The default value and input range are the same as those for Standard Print 2 Task Select Custom Print 3 Condition From the list select the time to execute printing The range 7 will vary depending on this condition Schedule Conditions and Range 4 Template file From the list select the template file tpl to apply to printing If no template files tpl IM 04L65B
244. project you can not change it name and change to a different name 8 E3015 The Project which is opening can not be deleted Delete the project after closing the relevant project 5 Q E3016 The Project which is running can not be deleted Delete the project after stopping the relevant project E3017 The maximum number of registered devices has been Delete any of the devices registered in the server first and then reached the device cannot be registered register the new device The device that you want to delete is being used in a project Check that the device is not being used in another project Delete the device from the Devices List on the Device Setting Page of other projects and then delete the device Original owner is opening projects you cannot change When the administrator tried to change the owner of a project the E3019 as ouer i current owner had the project opened Change the owner after the current owner closes the project SO i Check the information for accessing the device and the communication E3020 Server can not receive device information path between the server and device The specified drive does not exist Change the data file save destination folder E3022 Failed to start Universal Viewer Check whether Universal Viewer is installed in the PC E3023 An error occurred while reading the file Failed to load the file when importing a project or tag information Check that the file for importing is correct
245. pter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recordin Access Privilege Types and Operation Scope The table below shows the available project access privilege types and their operation scope Level Privilege Allowed Type Operations Operation Details 1 Owner All operations All operations including deleting the project Set project access privileges 2 Manager Setup Edit setup data Operation Start stop data monitoring or recording Monitor View recorded data files Open data files Delete data files Monitor collected data 3 Operator Operation View setup data Monitor Start stop data monitoring or recording View recorded data files Open data files Delete data files Monitor collected data 4 Monitor Monitor View recorded data files Open data files Monitor collected data To assign access privileges follow the procedure below Skip steps 1 and 2 if you are already setting the details of a project 1 The user who has owner privileges to the project logs in 2 In the Project List Page double click the appropriate project to open the project The selected project appears on the Project Page 3 Change the project setting window to the Access amp Others Setting Page A list of users registered in the server appears Data Logging Software admir File Edit View Project Operation User Help
246. r lt Type Register AL1 Trans PVAlarmTypeTable gt Alarm type 2 lt SetValue Register ALM1SP gt Alarm setting lt Value Register ALM Mask 0x0001 gt Alarm value lt Alarm gt lt Alarm gt Second alarm lt Type Register AL2 Trans PVAlarmType Table gt lt SetValue Register ALM2SP gt lt Value Register ALM Mask 0x0002 gt lt Alarm gt lt Alarm gt Third alarm lt Type Register AL3 Trans PVAlarmType Table gt lt SetValue Register ALM3SP gt lt Value Register ALM Mask 0x0004 gt lt Alarm gt lt Alarm gt Fourth alarm PV1 alarm information 2 PV1 Alarm Type Table is used to lt Type Register AL4 Trans PVAlarmType Table gt convert the value into specific units lt SetValue Register ALM4SP gt lt Value Register ALM Mask 0x0010 gt lt Alarm gt lt Alarms gt lt Channel gt lt Channel Name SP1 gt SP1 channel settings lt Init gt lt DecimalPos Register PDP1 gt lt Min Register SPLower gt lt Max Register SPUpper gt lt Unit Register PUNI1 Trans PVUnitTable gt lt Init gt lt Value Register SP1 gt lt Alarms gt lt Alarm gt lt Type Register AL1 Trans SPAlarmType Table gt lt SetValue Register ALM1SP gt lt Value Register ALM Mask 0x0001 gt lt Alarm gt lt Alarm gt lt Type Register AL2 Trans SPAlarmType Table gt lt SetValue Register ALM2SP gt IM 04L65B01 01EN 3 47 Bui
247. r SMTP server name up to 255 characters e Port No Port number that the SMTP server will use 0 to 65535 e Resend Times Select 0 1 2 3 4 or 5 If email transmission fails GA10 retries the specified number of times GA10 will retry to transmit 5 min utes after the previous transmission failure e Authentication Methods OFF no authentication SMTP Authentication or POP Before SMTP 3 Select the mail tapped pages and enter their names Mail01 is used in this example 4 Set On Off to On The Email Event Setting Page appears IM 04L65B01 01EN 3 31 Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording Email Event Setting Page You can set the following items on the Email Event Setting Page Set one set of conditions on each tabbed page ga Data Logging Software admin project_a Lo S 3 File Edit View Project Operation User Help E s Al eshte OC Xx elel star SMTP Server PortNo Resend Times 2 w Authentication Metho OFF w B 3 Tag v Mail 07 f Mail 08 Mail 10 Mail 11 3 1 Name Mail 04 Display v Q 8 On off 2 OorF ON lt gt Record 4 Condition G Alarm Status O Comm Status O Specified Period O Specified Duration O File is created TRIG 4 Easy Tag Range Tag 0001 Tag 0001 q E mail S Level1 Levei2 Levei Levela re
248. r up to 20 schedule settings tabbed pages and up to 20 template files PDF Excel e The template registration area can be shown or hidden by clicking the up down slide bar By default the template registration area is shown but once you change its state it is stored for each Windows user 1 Area for setting report schedules a T Q Data Logging Softwafe admin project_a lole x J File Edit View Project Operation User Help H 3 Ael D x 2 e start e ie Report 01 Repqt 02 J Report 03 Reporto4 Report 05 J Report 06 J Report 07 J Reports Y Report o9 Report 10 Report 11 RGL Vv Report 01 fosd epa None O Standard Print O Custom Print O Report Output m xD 0 GR No File Name Jnregistereg 08 Unregistered 09 Unregistered 40 Unregistered Area for registering template files Click this bar to show or hide the template registration area 3 59 Builpiooay pue UOI DAIJOD ezeq Buiuezs pue Hulinbiyuoy Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 2 Select the task default value None Settings appear in the schedule setting area depending on the selected task 3 Set the print schedule in line with the task e For details on the settings for each task see Standard Print Custom Print and Report Output e For Custom Print and Report Output you use a template file For instructions on how t
249. r alarms you can set Alarm 1 to Alarm 4 10 Alarm 1 to 4 Value Enter the alarm value e Default value 0 00 e Input range 3 4028235E 38 to 3 4028235E 38 11 Alarm 1 to 4 Hysteresis Enter the alarm hysteresis e Default value 0 00 e Input range 0 to 3 4028235E 38 Setting Math Constants You can use the following three types of constants They cannot be used in event functions or time functions e User defined math constant A constant that the user sets for specific text strings labels e Predefined math constant A constant that is already defined in the GA10 Math function e Numeric math constant A constant that the user enters directly in expressions using a number without setting a definition User Defined Math Constant User defined math constants are set in the Constant area the right side of the Math Tag Setting Page You can set up to 200 pairs of labels and values Consti Basic Operation 1 Click a cell in the Label column under Constant and enter a name for identifying the constant 2 Click a cell in the Value column and enter the value 3 52 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording IM 04L65B01 01EN a Label The name of the label Set using a text string that is not already used in predefined constants If duplicate constant names exist the first definition is used by expressions e Default value Blank e Input range Enter up to 10 characters
250. rag the pointer to move the desired 4 4 position to zoom in or out on the Y axis Moving the Y axis When you move the pointer on an Y axis scale the pointer changes to B In this condition drag the pointer to move the desired position to move the Y axis to the desired position e Compact Mode and Detail Mode A Y axis can be displayed in compact or detail mode In compact mode scale values are hidden narrowing the width of the Y axis In detail mode if you move the pointer on the Y axis and click the icon at the top of the Y axis the mode changes to compact In compact mode if you click the E icon the mode changes to detail Scrolling a Y axis Scale When you move the pointer on an Y axis scale the pointer changes to lt Q or Spinning the mouse wheel in this condition causes the Y axis scale to scroll maintaining the difference between the upper and lower limits of the scale Click the scale initialization icon ka to return the scale to its original position e Zooming in or out on an Y axis Scale When you move the pointer on an Y axis scale the pointer changes to Q or a Clicking when the pointer is Q shows a scale zoom in zoom out icon lt Click an arrow of the icon or spin the mouse wheel to zoom in or out on the scale value in reference to the icon position Click the scale initialization icon ka to return the scale to its original position Changing the Active Waveform gt Waveform Display
251. re Data project_a CReferto_ recs w File Name Data Attach the Date Attach the Time Comment Title String K m E lt D U Bi z 60 Jom Jon s jwn 5 ii E x eset Math When Recording Starts Select this check box In this situation the math reset timing is delayed by up to two recording intervals from the record start timing Setting the data recording method page 3 27 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 6 Configuring Auto Print RP option IM 04L65B01 01EN 3 6 1 Print Types and Basic Operation The GA10 s Report Print function RP option can be divided into the following three functions You can set which function to use and with what kind of schedule to print from the Report Print Setting Page Standard Print You can select the display group and display format trend graph circular sheet alarm list mark list and print from a data file at the specified time on the specified printer Custom Print You can select the display group and display format trend graph alarm list mark list and print from a data file according to the specified template file at the specified time on the specified printer Report Output You can create a report file PDF Excel from a data file according to the specified template file and
252. re below shows an example when Specified Period is selected for dividing File Division Set the conditions ue the time Specified Period Every Hour 4 00 00 Select Every Hour Everyday Every Week or Every Month Off File is not divided Specified Duration Based on the time of the first recorded data the file is divided at every specified hour and minute Example If the division time is 1 hour the time of the first recorded data is 3 00 00 and the record interval is 1 second the first file will contain the data from 3 00 00 to 3 59 59 and the second file will contain the data from 4 00 00 to 4 59 59 Specified Period Select Every Hour Everyday Every Week or Every Month and the absolute time to divide the data file Data Number The file is divided when the number of data values in the data file reaches the specified number Mo WCC The file is divided in the following situations e When the data file size exceeds 1 GB e When the data file output format is Excel and the number of recorded tags is 180 or less the files will be divided every 65535 rows When the number of recorded tags is 181 or more the files will be divided in groups of the maximum number of rows that meets the following condition number of tags No number of rows lt 11796428 e When the data file output format is binary and the number of recorded data points exceeds 10 million This number is the number of timestamps that
253. re is the same as described above When the specified alarm value is reached during recording GA10 stops recording and enters the recording standby state If the Start Condition is set to Level 1 Set Start Condition to Level Tag range threshold value and operation direction appear Tag range Level Tag Range C Twn 0 Up Type eeii Operation direction 2 Click the first or last tag selection button The Tag Index dialog box appears Tag 0015 l Tag 0016 Tag 0017 Tag 0018 Tag 0019 Tag 0020 C tmon JC Taz ____ C Tao O NO Taoa w IM 04L65B01 01EN 3 Select the applicable tag range The dialog box closes and the tag selection button display changes to the selected tag A Enter the threshold value Qy Set the operation direction to Up data value is greater than or equal to the threshold or Down data value is less than or equal to the threshold Click the Start Recording button to enter the record ing standby state When the monitored tag value reaches the threshold in the specified direction recording starts If the Stop Condition is set to Level The setting procedure is the same as described above When the monitored tag value reaches the threshold in the specified direction GA10 stops recording 5 File Division Set the conditions for dividing data files The settings vary depending on the selected condition The figu
254. respond to the following channel data types NT16 L Me WEEE A read error will occur in the following situations e A mandatory item is missing e There is a syntax error However in the following situations an error will not occur and the value will be corrected when it is read e There is a limit to the string length for a node attribute and this limit is exceeded e There is an allowable range for a node attribute and the value is outside the range i iiiiiiiiiik hdd dsccdddddccddcccdcddddddddddcdaacdcaadaddddddddddacdcaadaaddddddddddddaccadadadddddddddaaaaadaadddddddddadaddaaaaadda IM 04L65B01 01EN 3 45 Bulpioo9y pue UO DAIJOD eyeg Hulyieyg pue Hulsnbyuoy Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 4 3 Modbus Device Definition File Example A sample Modbus device definition file is provided in the following pages The sample shows how the XML file should be structured When you create a Modbus device definition file refer to the description of registers in the user s manual of the Modbus device that you want to connect lt xml version 1 0 encoding utf 8 gt lt ModbusDevice Type SAMPLEA PortNo 502 CommandDelay 0 gt Match Type Modbus device name with the file name lt Options gt lt Option Name remote gt lt Options gt lt Registers gt Specify all the data to load from the device lt Register Name PV1 FunctionCode 3 Address 40003 DataType INT16 gt l
255. riptions Acquisition area a Data time c Pre set mark PC time Monitor Interval 1 Second Data time b Monitor interval 3 23 Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 24 Setting Data Collection Conditions a Data time Timestamps are attached to data that GA10 collects from devices You can set the type of timestamp to use to Device time or PC time Device time is the time information that the data collection device uses PC time is the time information that the PC in which the server is installed uses If Device time is selected By selecting Device time you can synchronize the data in GA10 with the data in the corresponding device In addition the backfill function becomes available However if data is collected from multiple devices time offset can occur between the devices and the collection interval may be different In other words data cannot be collected simultaneously with synchronized timestamps What is the backfill function p gt page 3 21 A IMPORTANT The Math function MT option does not work when Device time is in use If you change to Device time after setting math tags a confirmation message will appear To keep the math settings enabled click Cancel If you click OK the changes will be applied and the math settings will be disabled CA ZOOO O OQO QQ Data collection using device time has the following lim
256. rmat From the list of options that appears when you click Date Format on the View menu select the date format This applies to all pages Month Display Form From the list of options that appears when you click Month Display Form on the View menu select the month display format This applies to all pages Item Description Digit Example 10 for October Character Example OCT for October Decimal Point On the View menu click Decimal Point to select the symbol to use for the decimal point This applies to all pages Item Description Period i Comma IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 4 Monitoring Data Collection 4 2 Monitoring on the Trend Display 4 2 1 Displayed Content Scan interval Group tab Trip line value Waveform Trip line Grid Y axis oO wefosa B 2 J o nmm AF Al o00 beL laleooo beL dlajeliijalalaihija jala lidisialeladiilalelbiiujal FS PAP PY A PP d Active waveform mark Legend Alarm display Time axis Vertical splitter Time axis scroll bar e Scan Interval The data collection interval e Group Tab Switches the displayed group Alarms occurring in tags of each group are indicated in red e Waveform Displays each waveform according to its corresponding data tag color gt Waveform Display e Grid The grid shown in the waveform display area e Trip Line Trip lin
257. roiect Information File pif Altos The project information file pjf extension is saved to the specified location Setting page area 3 6 IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recordin Note wanna e If you do not have access permission to the project you cannot export it e Ifthe project contains Modbus device connections the register and channel information of the Modbus devices are not exported You must save the definition files separately Modbus device definition file page 3 42 e OPC UA projects when the OPC UA server function UA option is in use cannot be imported or exported UCLA Import procedure 1 On the File menu click Import Project An Open dialog box appears 2 Select the file that you want to import pjf extension and click Open em Open Lookin 04Project files P m Name i Date modified Type an Project_1 pjf 2013 11 29 14 18 PJF File Recent Places 4 File name Projecti pif Files of type Proiect Information File pif File Edit View Project Operation User Help g s ALl wtb OOX e Importing a project created on a GA10 witha different system configuration GA10 version R2 02 xx or later If you try to import a project created on a GA10 with option functions additional channels math etc a message W2008 may appear This is because the project being imported contains functions that
258. rojects 1 On the Project List Page select the locked project Data File Edit View Project Operation User Help ETS Be t Ge E j Ja g aa s th k ElL Good Displays the user who locked the project 2 On the Project menu click Unlock Project Forcibly A confirmation message for unlocking appears IM 04L65B01 01EN 3 To proceed click OK The dialog box closes and the name of the user who locked the project disappears from the project re admin o 8 pg on User Help 2 HS Project_1 siaspn Bbulbeuew ss Bia eee Chapter 7 OPC UA Server Function UA option 7 1 Overview IM 04L65B01 01EN 7 1 1 Basic Functions of the OPC UA Server The GA10 s OPC UA server function enables OPC UA clients of a host system to access GA10 s data This function can be used to deliver tag information and measured values to OPC UA clients Basic functions of the OPC UA server are listed below Specification Description Compatible profile UA 1 02 Micro Embedded Server DataAccess Server Facet Used port 4840 OPC UATCP Protocol can be changed Maximum number of client connections 16 Max 16 sessions Maximum number of subscriptions 100 session Maximum number of monitor items 2000 session Sampling interval 100ms 200ms 500ms 1s 2s 5s 10s 20s 30s 1min 2min 5min 10min Supported services FindServ
259. rom the Claim if the infringement is arising from a modification of the Software Product made by a person other than Yokogawa b combination of the Software Product with hardware or software not furnished by Yokogawa c design or instruction provided by or on behalf of you d not complying with Yokogawa s suggestion or e any other causes not attributable to Yokogawa 5 5 This section states the entire liability of Yokogawa and its suppliers and the sole remedy of you with respect to any claim of infringement of a third party s intellectual property rights Notwithstanding anything to the contrary stated herein with respect to the claims arising from or related to the Third Party Software or OSS the special terms and conditions separately provided for such Third Party Software or OSS shall prevail 6 Limitation of Liability 6 1 EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT LIABILITY MAY NOT LAWFULLY BE EXCLUDED IN CONTRACT YOKOGAWA AND SUPPLIERS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR LEGAL ENTITY FOR LOSS OR DAMAGE WHETHER DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES OR OTHER SIMILAR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OR DESTRUCTION OF DATA LOSS OF AVAILABILITY AND THE LIKE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE OF THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT OR ARISING OUT OF ITS GENERATED APPLICATIONS OR DATA EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES WHETHER B
260. rting Data Collection and Recording When Condition Is Set to Interval or When Report Type Is Set to Daily custom Below is the display example for Condition and Range when Condition is set to Interval e Time span 2 cycles e Scale When Interval 4 hours 0 00 1 00 2 00 3 00 0 00 1 00 2 00 3 00 0 00 When Interval 6 hours 0 00 2 00 4 00 0 00 2 00 4 00 0 00 When Interval 8 hours 0 00 2 00 4 00 6 00 0 00 2 00 4 00 6 00 When Interval 12 hours 0 00 4 00 8 00 0 00 4 00 8 00 0 00 When Interval 24 hours 0 00 8 00 16 00 0 00 8 00 16 00 0 00 e Displayed using the previous cycle s color and current cycle s color light green and green from the start time to the end time Base Time 05 00 00 Los Loo Loo Los Loo Loo Range ois p Condition time 0 00 2 00 4 00 0 00 2 00 400 0 00 Start time End time Item Default Value Selectable Range Condition Interval Interval e Interval and specifiable base time range Interval 6h Hour 4h 6h When Interval 4h 00 00 00 to 03 59 00 Base time 8h 12h 24h When Interval 6h 00 00 00 to 05 59 00 00 00 00 Base time When Interval 8h 00 00 00 to 07 59 00 For Daily custom Hour 00 When Interval 12h 00 00 00 to 11 59 00 the interval is to 23 When Interval 24h 00 00 00 to 23 59 00 the file division Minute 00 interval to 59 Range Prev Cycle Prev Cycle Start Time Base time of the previous Conditio
261. s Name Comment Settings Mode Simple Settings C Detail Settings Leave this at Simple Settings Mo WCC If you select Simple Settings you can change to Detail Settings while you are configuring a new project but you cannot change from Detail Settings to Simple Settings xiii hd dd dgddssddcccadcdcdcddddddddddaadaadadddddddddddddddadadadada 4 Click oK A new project is created ga Data Logging Software admin File Edit View Project Operation mt oi S i oe EZ project a Owner admin 3 2 2 Registering Devices to Connect To register devices to the new project you must connect the devices to the network Below is an example of connecting a DX to the PC through the Ethernet interface 1 Connect the device and the PC through a network using LAN cables Ethernet The figure shows a one to one connection 2 Configure the Ethernet settings on the device Set the device s IP address and subnet mask On the DX Press MENU hold down FUNC for 3 s to switch to basic setting mode and select the Menu tab gt Communication Ethernet LLTO O OOOO For details on where the Ethernet port is located and the hierarchy of setting menus see the user s manual of the relevant device CUA 3 Check that the PC and the device have been connected You can check the connection using Windows De vice Manager or from the command prompt 4 Double click the project that you created The Simple Se
262. s available OPC UA server function UA availability 2 7 5 Changing the Language On the View menu click Language to switch the user interface language You can select from English Japanese Chinese French German Russian and Korean e The language setting is managed at the PC level e The default language is the OS language If the OS language is an unsupported language the language is set to English IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 2 Preparation 2 7 6 Uninstallation To uninstall GA10 follow the procedure below AN IMPORTANT 1 On the Start menu click Control Panel and Do not change or delete files in the following Programs and Features folder local disk gt ProgramData gt Yokogawa gt A list of programs installed in your PC appears SMARTDAC Data Logging Software gt Config 2 These files contain user information project Select SMARTDAC Data Logging Software setting information project status information Click Uninstall and device information O x D fad A gt gt All Control Panel Items Programs and Features X Search Programs and Features A Control Panel Home Uninstall or change a program View installed updates To uninstall a program select it from the list and then click Uninstall Change or Repair Turn Windows features on or g Organize v Change Install a program from the T network Name Publisher Installed On 2013 07 23 EiLhaplus 2013 07 12 B microsoft
263. s can be printed using Universal Viewer Universal Viewer is supplied with this software and installed along with this software You can also print a specified range of data at the specified time by adding the RP option 3 6 Configuring Auto Print RP option IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 8 Troubleshooting IM 04L65B01 01EN Q11 Q12 Device settings were changed At what point are the changes applied to data collection A11 Changes to devices before data collection is started This software retrieves device information when the device is registered to the Device List If this information is different from the actual device information at the start of data collection the software will collect data but will handle it as invalid data Check the following settings and match them Channel data type unit span decimal place alarm type and alarm value You can use Update Setting on the Device List to update the settings Changes to devices during data collection and recording If you change the device settings during data collection and recording the changes will not be reflected to the software Stop the data collection apply the setting changes using either of the methods below and restart the data collection e Execute Update Setting of the devices in the devices List e Register the device again However if data is being collected using Device time and you change the device s acquisition interval the software will re
264. s or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN
265. screen to collect or start and stop recording The procedure is similar to section 3 2 4 Controlling Opened Projects Simultaneously 1 Click the 4 icon at the left end of the toolbar The Project List Page appears 2 On the Operation menu click Start Monitoring Simultaneously Or click the p icon To start recording on the Operation menu click Start Recording Simultaneously Or click the ti icon A confirmation message appears 3 Click OK Data collection or recording will start 3 ES project a ES project a Owner admin Owner Data collecting Recording 4 To stop on the Operation menu click Stop Monitoring Simultaneously Or click the B icon To stop recording on the Operation menu click Stop Recording Simultaneously Or click the icon Mle WY e Projects that you can simultaneously control are those that you have Operator or higher privileges for e Ifa Modbus device definition file that you are using contains an error data collection will not start on the corresponding project xxiii hdd dgspsddddcccadcdddddddddddddaaddddddddadadadddddddadddadadadada 3 42 3 4 Registering Modbus Devices 3 4 1 Registration of Modbus Devices GA10 can connect to devices that use the Modbus protocol To register such a device you must create a Modbus device definition file in advance and save it in a specific server folder If you are using GA10 R1 02 or later UTAdvanced series
266. set the entire monitor data restart monitoring and stop recording Do not change the time on the device after starting data collection and recording because doing so will cause adverse effects on the monitor screen and recorded data When the connected device is a SMARTDAC series GX GP or GM device and the GA10 version is R2 02 xx or later alarm information changed on devices during data collection is reflected on the monitor Changes in the alarm on off states and types are reflected on the monitor Note that changes in alarm types are not reflected in the alarm list of the recording file Buljoousajqnoly What is the difference between setting the Data time to PC time and setting the Data time to Device time A12 For information on the different data collection conditions see also Setting Data Collection Conditions on page 3 24 The following table summarizes the major differences For a detailed explanation see the following pages Differences Collection and Display D ipti Backfill Saved Data Fil escription acktlll pacord Interval qeenaimaniter aved Data Files ime onthe N Select from No display limitations because all Data can be PC time server PC available the data can be displayed on the saved toa single options same time axis file i The intervalon If there are The page is Files are divided i each device is multiple devices subdivided and by a combination used so it is with different a list is displa
267. set to 1025 to 65535 Devices and Ethernet and Device Interfaces Type is DAQLOGGER DAQ32Plus MXLOGGER GateWT 7 System Select from the O Same as above No list Selectable range 0 to 60 When Comm Kind is set to Serial Register device Deivce Name Device Deivce Type Dx1000 Comm Kind Serial z COM Port No 1 Comm Type RS 422RS 485 2 Baud Rate 9600bps Parity aD Stop Bit 4D Address 13 Item Name How to Specify ee Description 8 COM Port Select from the list 1 This appears when No Selectable range Comm Kind is set to 1 to 20 Serial or USB 9 Comm Select from the list RS 232C This appears when Type Selectable range Comm Kind is set to RS 232C RS 422 Serial RS 485 10 Baud Rate Select from the list 9600bps Same as above Selectable range 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 11 Parity Select from the list Selectable range None EVEN ODD None Same as above 3 12 Item Name How to Specify Description 12 Stop Bit Select from the list 1 Same as above Selectable range 1 or 2 13 Address Select from the list 1 This appears when Comm Kind is set to Serial and Comm Type is set to RS 422 RS 485 Selectable range 1 to 99 When Comm Kind is set to Serial and Device Type is a Modbus device Register de
268. sing the Software Product and in accordance with sub clause 2 5 return or irretrievably delete all copies of the Software Product certifying the same in writing In this case the license fee paid by you for the Software Product shall not be refunded Clauses 2 4 and 2 5 3 5 6 and 11 shall survive any termination of this Agreement 11 Governing Law Disputes This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of Japan Any dispute controversies or differences which may arise between the parties hereto out of in relation to or in connection with this Agreement Dispute shall be resolved amicably through negotiation between the parties based on mutual trust Should the parties fail to settle the Dispute within ninety 90 days after the notice is given from either party to the other the Dispute shall be addressed in the following manner i If you are a Japanese individual or entity the Dispute shall be brought exclusively in the Tokyo District Court The Main Court in Japan ii If you are not a Japanese individual or entity the Dispute shall be finally settled by arbitration in Tokyo Japan in accordance with the Commercial Arbitration Rules of the Japan Commercial Arbitration Association All proceedings in arbitration shall be conducted in the English language unless otherwise agreed The award of arbitration shall be final and binding upon both parties however each party may make an application to any court h
269. specified report settings You can create report data PDF Excel of the average maximum minimum sum and instantaneous values over a specified duration In addition custom print and report output can be performed manually from the Data files Page 5 3 Printing Recorded Data Manually RP option The following table shows the print types and their characteristics Standard Custom Report Output Auto printing at the Auto printing at the Auto printing at the U specified time specified time using the specified time using the se ae ne specified layout specified layout and report type Hourly Daily Weekly Hourly Daily Weekly Hourly Daily eaadiion Monthly Periodically Monthly Periodically Daily Weekly End of record End of record Daily Monthly Batch Daily custom Cannot be specified Can be specified Can be specified None Report templates for Report templates for Print Layout PDF report files tpl Excel report files xlsx xlsm Report templates for PDF report files tpl Print type Trend Graph Trend Graph Circular Sheet Alarm List Treng Graph Alarm List Alarm List Mark List Wark Liet Mark List Graph Number of graphs 1 graph setting Up to 4 graphs setting Up to 4 graphs setting Items Specified with Print Specified with keyword Specified with keyword Header Output channel Cannot be specified Cannot be specified Max 100ch ee Local printer Local printer Local printer Print Destination PDF f
270. ssaees 5 3 Chapter 6 Managing Users 6 1 Admimieitator and ISCLS sassen Ena EEEE E 6 1 6 2 Managing iW ole a 0 eee eee EONA EA E EEEE eee EEAS EEN 6 2 6 2 1 Using the User Management Page ccccsssecesseseececseseeesseseeessenecesssasseeensaneeensensess 6 2 6 3 Changmg WSO FIORINA ON asc soeseseeescnetet ec tenet cctastecqusennccecsetedauedonetoossasecacseeetequaeeseenseneeacedenes 6 2 6 3 1 How the Administrator Changes Other User Information 0ccccccsessseeeeeeeeaneseeeeeees 6 2 6 3 2 How Users Change Their Information cccccssseccceceeeseeeeeeseeesseeeeseaesseeeeeesananseeeeees 6 3 6 4 Registering and Deleting Users ccccccccssccccssseeceseceenseceeseseeesesceneseeneaeeeseueeessueesneaeess 6 3 6 4 1 Registering a New UsersS sssesnsseseosrereserrererrrrrerrrrrrrrrrrrtrrresrnrrentreeernreretnrrennreeerereee 6 3 6 4 2 Delenio A USET eiia T Trt enteric rarer re ert t 6 4 6 4 3 Changing a Project Owner saacics lt nosssnnceserceknsanensnnes entenaunerkesasancoonesbastasaeniesantenceseikesananesoens 6 4 6 4 4 Opening a Project at a Specific Privilege LeVel cccccccsssseeeeeeseeneeseeeeseanesseeeeseanees 6 4 6 4 5 Unlocking a Projeci Dy F OCS naicen rinn Ear AEE Ear A RA 6 5 Chapter 7 OPC UA Server Function UA option 7 1 GVON IEW o ee E E a 7 1 Talet Basic Functions of the OPC UA Servel ccccccccececceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaaaaaaaeseeeeeeeeesenaaas 7 1 Tole
271. starts If the start condition is set to specify herecordinena Alarm or Level GA10 enters a recording standby state i Data Number Stops recording at the specified number of data 2 Record File Type points If the start condition is set to Alarm or Specify the data output format Level GA10 enters a recording standb state You can save the recorded file in binary format did Specified Period Stops recording at the specified period and enters E If recording standby state extension or Excel format xlsx extension Alarm Stops recording using the alarm status as a sda trigger and enters recording standby state 3 Start Condition Level Stops recording using a collected data value as a You can specify the following for the start condition trigger and enters recording standby state Start Condition Description Immediate Starts recording when the Start Recording button Mle WEEE is clicked e Ifyou set the start condition to Specified Period the Specified Time _ Starts recording when the specified time arrives Specified Period Records at the specified period stop condition is fixed to Specified Period e Ifthe start condition is set to Specified Period and dii e Ea the recording start time is set to the same time as the Level Starts recording using a collected data value as record stop time the recorded data file is not divided a trigger at every interval e Ifthe start condition is set to Specified Per
272. t the number of tags handled by the server If Start Monitoring Simultaneously cannot be executed it could be any of the following reasons e The number of simultaneously running projects or simultaneously connected devices exceeds the limit e There is not enough available memory on Windows If Start Recording Simultaneously cannot be executed it could be any of the following reasons in addition to the reasons listed above e The data save destination folder failed to be created Close projects that do not require data collection To start recording change the data file save destination folder Try the following e Stop other running programs e Reduce the number of simultaneously running projects e Increase the PC RAM e If you are using a 32 bit edition try a 64 bit edition Fail to start monitoring because the necessary setting There is an error in the information that is used during data collection Insufficient memory available to the OS Operation EUa failed E3049 Failed to operate some projects or all project at once Insufficient memory available to the OS Project will E3050 close Eu is not correct Check for errors in Modbus device definition files E3052 Operation failed because device has been deleted Update the device information on the Registered Devices List Searching is not allowed because auto search in Another client is searching devices with different search conditions E3053 l progress Wait for
273. t List Page you can determine which projects are affected by the communication disconnection by checking the changes in the communication status icon of each project The status icons are valid only when the project is open Move to the Project List Page Communication status icons Disconnected Normal Owner admin Owner admin admin Locking i Locking All devices are connected At least one device is disconnected When communication is restored data collection and recording resume e If communication recovers before an Acknowledge of Device Communication Interference is performed the communication status icon will return to normal IM 04L65B01 01EN 4 7 Checking the Project Operation Status Click the Status Page icon on the Project tab to display the Status Page A Status Page is used to monitor e The project data collection and recording status e The communication status between the data collection device in the project and the server The displayed data is automatically updated periodically 4 7 1 Displayed Content Project operation status Device communication status old nl hyl ml la 4 3 3 Project Status Stopped Monitoring Record Standby or Recording e Loss Data Recording data dropout status e Write Error Whether data writing to the data file is being performed normally Beginning Time of Recording The time of the first dat
274. t Register Name SP1 FunctionCode 3 Address 40004 DataType INT16 gt Parameters loaded as lt Register Name OUT1 FunctionCode 3 Address 40005 DataType INT16 gt Pe ie lt Register Name MOD1 FunctionCode 3 Address 40008 DataType INT16 gt No etc lt Register Name PIDNO1 FunctionCode 3 Address 40009 DataType INT16 gt lt Register Name SPNO FunctionCode 3 Address 40010 DataType INT16 gt lt Register Name ERROR1 FunctionCode 3 Address 40002 DataType INT16 gt lt Register Name BSL FunctionCode 3 Address 41209 DataType INT16 gt lt Register Name PUNI1 FunctionCode 3 Address 41230 DataType INT16 gt lt Register Name PDP1 FunctionCode 3 Address 41231 DataType INT16 gt TETEE EE E lt Register Name PV1Upper FunctionCode 3 Address 41232 DataType INT16 gt a a lt Register Name PV1Lower FunctionCode 3 Address 41233 DataType INT16 gt unit decimal place lt Register Name SPUpper FunctionCode 3 Address 40933 DataType INT16 gt AAM BIC lt Register Name SPLower FunctionCode 3 Address 40934 DataType INT16 gt lt Register Name SPNOUpper FunctionCode 3 Address 40940 DataType INT16 gt lt Register Name ALM FunctionCode 3 Address 40011 DataType INT16 gt lt Register Name AL1 FunctionCode 3 Address 40915 DataType INT16 gt lt Register Name AL2 FunctionCode 3 Address 40916 DataType INT16 gt
275. t be displayed the end is abbreviated with ellipses Server Select this to use a template file registered in GA10 Registered templates will be displayed in a list Template File dialog box Local Click this to use a template file from a PC An standard Open dialog box will appear File Name Enter the name of the report file to create manually using up to 60 characters The file name is created according to the following rules Input file name_creation time_serial number Creation time YYYYMMDDhhmmss no spaces Serial number 6 digits 0 filled Output Folder Select the folder to save the generated reports in e Default value Data Folder e Options Data Folder Subfolder in the data folder Specified Folder Save Location Description Data Folder Displays the GA10 data folder Example C Users Public Documents SMARTDAC Data Logging Software Data Subfolder in the data folder Enter the name of a subfolder in the data folder Enter up to 255 characters Specified Folder Enter the path to the specified folder or use the Browse button to specify it When entering the path use up to 255 characters Output Printer Select whether to print Selecting Yes displays a list of registered printers However Output Printer does not appear for an Excel template file When using an Excel template you cannot print directly from GA10 Output Language Specify the language for the printed materials The date format and de
276. t the same setting as the decimal place setting specified on the device Specify ANY to retrieve the decimal place information from the device at the start of data collection See below Type Dec Point and ANY GA10 can continue data collection even if you change the connected device in the middle of data collection as long as the Type and Dec Point settings are the same For example assume you set the tag Type to SHORT If another device is connected in the middle of data collection for maintenance or other purpose as long as the measurement channels use the same Type and Dec Points settings you can continue data collection You can select ANY if you want to retrieve the channel information from the device at the start of data collection and use those settings to perform data collection However if the data collection time is set to PC time and the device is not connected within 3 seconds after the start of data collection the channel information will not be retrieved at the start of data collection even if ANY is specified In this situation the channel information that was retrieved from the device at the time of device registration is used This is not a problem as long as the channel information at the start of data collection is the same as the channel information that was retrieved from the device at the time of device registration Using ANY makes the data type and decimal place settings easier However you cannot verify th
277. t to start the recording all at once M1005 Do you want to stop the recording all at once _ M1006 Do you want to stop the recording M1007 Do you want to log out 2 wenn M1008 Do you want to enforce to be unlock This is a message that asks the administrator to confirm the unlocking of the locked project M1009 Do you want the user s s password to be initialized This is a message that asks the administrator to confirm the initialization of a user password xxx indicates the name of the user whose password will be initialized M1010 Trial version is time up operation is prohibited This message appears when a client accesses the server after the server trial period has expired M1011 Successed in Activation This message indicates that the client license has been registered successfully M1012 Server is activated Please restart server After the server license registration is complete the server needs to be restarted M1013 Option is added to server Please restart server to After an option is added to the server the server needs to be restarted enable option M1014 Is it OK to exit This message asks whether you want to close the client M1015 OK to add new channels of new devices or changed This message appears when a device is added to the Devices List or devices in the tag settings The current tags when a device channel is added If you click OK the changed device information is
278. ta collection interval or record interval on GA10 e Data is saved to separate files for each device and for each data acquisition interval PC time Tags for device A and device B Data file Device time Tag for device A Tag for device A Tag for device B collection interval A1 collection interval A2 collection interval B1 Data Data Data file file file a Device A Device B Collection Collection intervals interval A1 and A2 B1 The device number device name and device acquisition interval are included in the names of data files Below is the file name format when date and time are included FileName DeviceNo DeviceName Interval YYYYMMDDhhmmss ext FileName The file name string specified by the user DeviceNo Device number on the Device Setting Page DeviceName Device name on the Device Setting Page Interval The acquisition interval of each device IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 8 Troubleshooting IM 04L65B01 01EN Monitor The trend monitor displays data based on a single time axis If there are multiple devices the Monitor Set will be divided and waveforms in the display group will be displayed in windows divided at the interval level Only up to four divided windows can be displayed Anything in excess will not be displayed A similar behavior will also occur in alarm lists
279. tag number can be specified Alarm lt TagIndex gt lt alarmLevel gt Returns the alarm value of the specified tag ON 1 OFF 0 Alarm 0001 4 Either tag index or tag number can be specified Alarm lt TagIndex gt Returns the alarm value of the specified tag Alarm 0001 ON 1 OFF 0 Either tag index or tag number can be specified Alarm Returns the alarm value of any tag Alarm ON 1 OFF 0 Arithmetic Functions Function Action Example sin lt Value gt Returns the sine of lt Value gt sin TAG 0001 cos lt Value gt Returns the cosine of lt Value gt cos TAG 0001 tan lt Value gt Returns the tangent of lt Value gt tan TAG 0001 asin lt Value gt Arc sine asin TAG 0001 acos lt Value gt Arc cosine acos TAG 0001 sinh lt Value gt Hyperbolic sine sinh TAG 0001 cosh lt Value gt Hyperbolic cosine cosh TAG 0001 tanh lt Value gt Hyperbolic tangent tanh TAG 0001 pow lt Value1 gt lt Value2 gt lt Value1 gt to the power of lt Value2 gt pow TAG 0001 TAG 0002 sqrt lt Value gt Square root sqrt TAG 0001 logE lt Value gt Natural logarithm logE TAG 0001 log10 lt Value gt Common logarithm log10 TAG 0001 expE lt Value gt E to the power of lt Value gt expE TAG 0001 exp10 lt Value gt 10 to the power of lt Value gt exp10 TAG 0001 max lt Value gt lt Value gt Maximum value among multiple max TAG 00
280. taneously 3 42 lj Stop Recording Simultaneously All opened Projects stop recording simultaneously 3 42 Waring Beep Stop the Warning Beep Turn on or off the warning beep that sounds when a warning occurs 4 10 Stop the warning beep Acknowledge of Device Communiation Interface Perform an acknowledge of device communication interference User Change Information Register New User Change user s information 2 4 6 2 6 3 Register new user in server 2 4 6 3 IM 04L65B01 01EN yONpojg au Buisp 310499 Bi ss Bia eee Chapter 2 Preparation 2 1 Preparation from Installation up to Data Collection and Recording The following flowchart shows an outline of the procedure from GA10 installation up to data collection and recording Sec 2 2 Adding functions gt Sec 2 7 3 Installation Log in Sec 2 3 Register the administrator password Register users Sec 2 5 Create a project for data collection and recording Sec 26 NO Use existing projects e Export and import Save and load projects settings YES e Copy and paste Copy and paste existing projects settings Sec 3 3 1 uoljeieddig Sec 2 4 Cc ke pra 4 4 L A Create a new project Configure settings and start logging Select the Quickly start logging i setting mode Simple Settings Sec 3 2 Detail Settings Sec 3 3 iy Switc
281. te Disabled for monitor users Status Page button A button for calling up the Status Page The behavior is the same as that for typical projects None IM 04L65B01 01EN Running Setting Page Access Privileges When the Project Is State Opened Owner Manager Operator Not Device Enabled Enabled Enabled2 monitoring Tag Enabled Enabled Disabled Math Tag Enabled Enabled Disabled Server Enabled Enabled Disabled Operation Access amp Others Enabled Enabled Disabled Monitoring Device Enabled2 Enabled2 Enabled2 Tag Disabled Disabled Disabled Math Tag Disabled Disabled Disabled Server Disabled Disabled Disabled Operation Access amp Others Enabled Disabled Disabled 1 Only Keep Lock State and DDE Server in the page are enabled All others are disabled 2 Devices List in the page is disabled All others are enabled 3 Keep Lock State and DDE Server are enabled All others are enabled 7 5 uondo yn uonouny 4eAJag YN JdO E Chapter 7 OPC UA Server Function UA option Device Setting Page Selecting Device displays the Device Setting Page The function is the same as that for normal projects For the procedure see 3 3 2 Registering Devices to Connect Tag Setting Page Selecting Tag displays the Tag Setting Page The basic tag functions are the same as those for normal projects However because there is no recording function the corresponding column do
282. te OO x Bie 2 oS Device v PC time amp Tag vV 1 Second Math Tag v Server Name GA10 UA Server Lih Server Setting lt Port No Anonymous Login Allow O Prohibit Version v3 Issuer GA10 UAServer CPC001 13654 06 Serial No 5d 22 47 f5 d0 Valid from 2014 11 17 15 44 32 Signature Algorithm sha1WithRSAEncryption Valid to 2037 12 02 06 00 00 Signature Hash Algorithm SHA1 Install a certificate Generate a self signed certificate Issue a certificate signing request CSR The page is divided into three areas Monitor Server Setting and Server Certificate Each area is described below e Monitor PC time 1 Second 1 Data time Select the time to assign to data e Default value PC time e Input range PC time Device time You cannot set this when monitoring is in progress 2 Monitor Interval Select the data monitor interval e Default value 1s e Input range 100ms 200ms 500ms 1s 2s 5s 10s 20s 30s 1min 2min 5min 10min You cannot select this when Data time is set to Device time In addition note that if set to Device time math tag settings will be disabled Related topic gt Setting Data Collection Conditions IM 04L65B01 01EN 7 7 Chapter 7 OPC UA Server Function UA option e Server Setting erver Name GA10 UA Server 2 ePort No 4840 Anonymous Login Allow Prohibit 1 Server Name Enter t
283. te are inconsistent E3071 Can not import the project It contains unavailable There is not enough number of channels tags or an option is not function available for importing the relevant project The number of channels tags or optionson the server do not meet the configuration requirements of the project that you are trying to import E3072 Failed to generate a self signed certificate The private key does not exist or you do not have write privileges to the folder E3073 Failed to paste project The project cannot be pasted because there is not enough disk space on the server IM 04L65B01 01EN 8 5 Buljooyusajqnoiy Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 8 2 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Can the server and client be installed and run in the same PC A1 Yes The server and client can be installed in the same PC or in different PCs Is there a way to back up the recording data files automatically A2 You can use the mail transmission feature to send generated data files as email attachments You can store the data files as back up in the device receiving the email messages The communication between the server and the data acquisition device was disconnected How does the server behave when communication is restored A3 Resuming data collection and recording The server will retry to connect approximately every 30 seconds When reconnection is successful the server resumes data collection and record
284. ter that require users to enter the file name cannot be used e With the report print function the maximum number of recording data points over the duration is 32 million Data beyond this limit is not printed in standard print or custom print Such data becomes blank in report files The following table shows the estimated recording duration for 32 million points of recording data Recording Interval 100 ms 1s 10s Days 37 days 370 days 3703 days e Report output and printing use a large amount of memory The virtual memory of the operating system must be increased depending on the number of recording tags or recording duration As a guideline we recommend that you install main memories to cover at least a third of the total required memory The following table shows the memory size required for report output and printing If Condition Is Set to Every Day Recording Interval 100 ms 1s 10s 100 Approx 1 GB Approx 125 MB Approx 125 MB Number of tags 500 Approx 5 GB Approx 625 MB Approx 625 MB 2000 Approx 20 GB Approx 2 5 GB Approx 2 5 MB If Condition Is Set to Every Month Recording Interval 1s 10s 100 Approx 3 5 GB Approx 3 5 MB Number of tags 500 Approx 17 5 GB Approx 17 5 GB 2000 Approx 70 GB Approx 70 GB If Condition Is Set to Recording is finished or Batch The following equation can be used to roughly calculate the required memory size Required memory size Memory size for when Condition is set to Everyday x the number o
285. th data collection and recording in progress BIS Project e An open project is locked other users cannot edit it Click E Project List Page to view projects that are locked Details on the page when data collection and recording is in progress Chapter 4 Monitoring Data Collection Me WCC You cannot perform the following operations while data is being collected e Register devices from the Online Devices List to the Devices List e Register a new device on the Devices List e Change device registration positions on the Devices List e Delete registered devices from the Devices List e Change the settings of registered devices on the Devices List e Specify the record interval xix dd ddd ssdsdccccccddddddddddddcaddadadddddddddddddddadadadada IM 04L65B01 01EN 3 5 Buipsosay pue uona gq Bunes pue Bulinbyu05 DA Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 3 Detailed Configuration Detail You can switch between different setting pages by clicking Settings the items in the left navigator In Detail Settings mode you can customize data collection monitoring and recording This section 3 Expand reduce button explains how to configure the settings in Detail Settings SS mode before starting data collection g 3 3 1 Creating a Project in Detail Settings Mode x A v mark ial Creating a New Project New Import Export Copy i ee aa ere Paste e settings bd Create a new pro
286. the Meter Display ccs nvcdersxiaienalenicdviginem iar nacmnsseiewts ait 4 4 1 Di played Content csser eee ae eee eet eee eae er 4 5 Mo nitonng ANNs sesiis EA rE lr Ei Aka i aa 4 5 1 Group OVVIE Wesana eea EE rE EAE EEA EO EEREN 4 5 2 TA OVVIE W airone aanne REEERE EERO 4 5 3 Alarni IV CTS WY sorrisi oari oora henni ronnen o EROE Rr OEE SEREEN EERE 4 6 ASIC RIAA acccs care tcc sesterccceasceegasenteudessecdeesnsneeesadet E S ERE 4 6 1 Displaying the Alarm Overview Dialog BOX cccceceeesseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeennees 4 6 2 Notification of Alarms and Communication Errors with Sound 0 4 6 3 Perform Alarm ACK Operations ccccsscccccseceeeseeeeeeceeceeeseeeeeeseeeeeeesanes 4 6 4 Performing an Acknowledge of Device Communication Interference IM 04L65B01 01EN Contents Contents 4 7 Checking the Project Operation Status i icicc2 sciteceds dence iesesonesetaelaccssactelentsraniesestdeessasachicase 4 11 4 7 1 Displayed COMMU eainiie E EEE EEEE EEE TEE ASE 4 11 4 8 Viewing Report Schedules RP Option cccccccsseececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeas 4 12 4 8 1 Reporty PrN DCCC csi sccececcssseneqascteaannetaceaceetansintabieteetqussecesabatedegeasanscemsiadecatateatesnneesaas 4 12 4 8 2 Report Print HIStOTY ssicgsasiceni cast aietcndteciaxanrntdaventunceitossaemarctuiaedncapcieeciatnseestndiaxanreebeteoanns 4 13 4 9 Controlling Devices during Data Collection cccccc
287. the option would cause the number of tags to exceed the Tag upgrade option s serial no is invalid Fail to add maximum recording tags in the project In the server information dialog E3043 ape option s serial no box check the current number of tags and check whether the option that you tried to add is appropriate E3044 Part of the data files can not be deleted Some of the data files that you tried to delete could not be deleted They may be in use Some of the data files that you tried to open could not be opened E3045 Part of the data files can not be opened Update the information on the Data files Page and check that the data files exist Failed in registration The administrator authority is Log on again as a Windows administrator Or choose Run as E3046 required Please restart as an administrator or runas administrator when starting Data Logging Software In Windows 7 administrator and restart right click the software icon and click Run as administrator Try the following e Stop other running programs e Reduce the number of simultaneously running projects e Increase the PC RAM e If you are using a 32 bit edition try a 64 bit edition Since the number of tags in the imported project The number of tags in the project that you are trying to import exceeds E3048 configuration information exceeded the number of tags the number of tags handled by the current server Consider increasing supported by the current server failed to impor
288. the project ARO OOOO TTA You can select multiple users by clicking while holding down the SHIFT or CTRL key on the keyboard CA All Users The user list displays a user named All Users You can use this to assign access privileges to all users in the server user list You can assign access privileges to both All Users and individual users If you do the higher privilege takes effect for such users Mle WC e If you assign access privileges to All Users on the Setting Page and then add or delete individual users All Users will also be updated e Before deleting project access privileges of a user check the user status Oi dddsssssddddccccccdddddddacdddddddaddddddddaddddddde If you delete an owner user gt page 6 4 To open a project with lower access privileges gt page 3 1 3 39 Buipiosay pue uona geq Bunes pue Bulinbyu05 D Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording 3 3 9 Holding the Lock State When Keep Lock State is enabled under Others on the Access amp Others Page only the user that starts data collection will be able to operate the relevant project The Keep Lock state is retained until the user that started data collection logs in again and stops the data collection This feature is set to OFF by default To use it select ON Select ON to set the Keep Lock State feature Others Keep Lock State O OFF DDE Server OY OFF 0 WY ECCCCCCCCCCCCOOOOOOOQO
289. tion device was disconnected How does the server behave when communication is restored 8 6 Q4 How does backfill work soiuctiviesiceudetscisianndivesseednied inisloiastiblcaudidaisiadeleiicdiansuny Iaido Aisionecuneiatbuedi 8 6 Q5 The server stopped or the server PC shut down How does the server operate after it EE E a E TEE A E A EE T A A E E EE AAT 8 7 Q6 A communication error occurred between the client and server Will data collection COMMING E EA T T A TEE A E E AETA 8 8 Q7 Unable to control the project Why ac scisccendncdeacaanecnassasnoasena vienaseacatesedenseiadadavsatnouesesetic 8 8 Q8 forgot the user password What do GO wiiccdwvsnssnevsalsicniacinsaandastenbcnnsealauettintiveexeantemanentys 8 8 Q9 The device data and the data collected and recorded by GA10 are not synchronized W e E E E E EE E E 8 8 Q10 Can the recorded data be printed ovccessi cccesisscccvuaars a sdaacesndcaespeuieds cosines acdsiuassasadoctacevdexes 8 8 Q11 Device settings were changed At what point are the changes applied to data collection 8 9 Q12 What is the difference between setting the Data time to PC time and setting the Data time tO DOVICE TIMO Prde en ESE EEE E AEEA 8 9 Appendix 1 Creating Report Templates ccccccccccseccecsceceeececeeeeesseeeeesseeeesseeeesseeeesaeeeseaeeeees App 1 ss Bia eee 1 1 Overview IM 04L65B01 01EN RS 422 485 nstruments supporting Chapter 1 Before Using the Product Data Logg
290. tiple consecutive files na Example Selecting consecutive files File005 File006 File Edit View Project Operation User Help H2o0 wh amp amp je 2 Markt e eg Bulpsooay Huibeuew a H Gooa PETE mE and File007 Folder C Users Public Documents SMARTDAC Data Logging Software ata Project1 P x j paa ust 7 e Click File005 Drag to File007 and release the File Name Data Number Record Interval Start Time EA End Time File Size sJ 8 3 R Data 20131119095948 did 300 1 Second 2013 11 19 09 59 48 000 2013 11 19 10 04 47 000 31160 m b tt n Data 20131119095448 did 300 1 Second 2013 11 19 09 54 48 000 2013 11 19 09 59 47 000 31160 O u se u O Data 20131119094948 did 300 1 Second 2013 11 19 09 49 48 000 2013 11 19 09 54 47 000 31160 M g f Data 20131119094448 did 300 1 Second 2012 11 19 09 44 48 000 2013 11 19 09 49 47 000 31160 Data 20131119093948 did 300 1 Second 2013 11 19 09 39 48 000 2013 11 19 09 44 47 000 31160 e Click File005 to select it While holding the Shift key Data 20131119093448 did 300 1 Second 2013 11 19 09 34 48 000 2013 11 19 09 39 47 000 31160 E Data 20131119092948 did 300 1 Second 2013 11 19 09 29 48 000 2013 11 19 09 34 47 000 31160 4 Data 20131119092448 did 300 1 Second 2013 11 19 09 24 48 000 2013 11 19 09 29 47 000 31160 d OW n cl ck F e0 0 T Data 20131119091948 did 300 1 Second 2013 11 19 09 19 48 000 2013 11 19 09 24 47 000 31160 7
291. ts cannot be used in time functions Function Action time lt year gt lt month gt lt day gt lt hour gt lt minute gt Edge action on the date and time bfTime lt year gt lt month gt lt day gt lt hour gt lt minu te gt Previous edge action on the date and time time lt year A gt lt month A gt lt day A gt lt hour A gt lt minute A gt lt year B gt lt month B gt lt day B gt lt hour B gt lt minute B gt Level action between time A and B monthly lt day gt lt hour gt lt minute gt Edge action on lt day gt every month at lt hour gt lt minute gt bfMonthly lt day gt lt hour gt lt minute gt Previous edge action on lt day gt every month at lt hour gt lt minute gt monthly lt day A gt lt hour A gt lt minute A gt lt day B gt lt hour B gt lt minute B gt Level action between lt day A gt lt hour A gt lt minute A gt and lt day B gt lt hour B gt lt minute B gt every month weekly lt day of week gt lt hour gt lt minute gt Edge action on lt day of week gt every week at lt hour gt lt minute gt bfWeekly lt day of week gt lt hour gt lt minute gt Previous edge action on lt day of week gt every week at lt hour gt lt minute gt weekly lt day of week A gt lt hour A gt lt minute A gt lt day of week B gt lt hour B gt lt minute B gt Level action between lt day of week A gt
292. ttings page opens File Edit View Project Operation User Help H2 8 2 whe om 002 aa D oy m SX comm Kind E Ethernet 5 Click Search in the Online Devices List on the right side of the page Devices connected to the network are detected and displayed Click Search IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recordin 6 Drag amp drop the icon of the device that you want to register to the Device List on the left side of the page Data Logging Software admin Project_A1 File Edit View Project Operation User Help Aso wh amp i F F i aa gt Detail Settings information X aS Click to start monitor Ly pelog A pes iz Click to start record Acknowledge Hide next time D 0 Bix a v x p7 018 p19 020 10 1 32 136 10 1 32 106 10 1 32 127 10 1 32 121 wd Le Gxio GP 4 mw400 5 Monitor Record Interval 1 Second Folder C Users Public Documents SMARTDAC Data Logging Software Data Project_A1 Refer to In the center of the page a window appears showing the details of the device that you are about to register
293. tuation only one administrator will be able to log in sealed aii IM 04L65B01 01EN Chapter 3 Configuring and Starting Data Collection and Recording Changing the Registration Information Select a device icon on the Devices List and double click it A Change Device s Basic Information dialog box appears Edit the items you want to change The items that you can change in this dialog box are the same as those in the Register Device dialog box when you register devices Select the device and double click P Change Device s Basic Information Deivc Name Device Deivce Type Comm Kind Ethernet Host Name P Address 10 1 32 85 User Name admin 013 User ID Password l OK j cance 017 Deleting a Registration To delete a registered device click the device icon to select it and click Delete on the Edit menu You can also select the device icon and press the DELETE key Select the device to delete and click Bx 2lel Updating the Settings If you change the device settings after registering it to the Devices List click Update Setting The most recent information will be retrieved from the device and applied Select the device and Register Device iC pdate Setting A 0000 d p04 oa ov 00 i Device Device 10 1 32 85 10 1 32 128 click the Update Setting
294. u click the Register Device If you move to another setting page return to the button Register Device Page and add devices a confirmation message M1015 will appear when you try to move to Reoister device another page Deivce Name Device Clicking OK will add the tag of the added device after the ee existing tags on the Tag Setting Page Clicking Cancel ou a will not add the tag ee ememet LL eciggicdcccddccddccddedeededecddeeed nett Connectable Devices and Interfaces cele Interface ree Supported Models Nene Ethernet irasai or Software Serial USB connection port pO number Cancel j DX1xxx DX1000 Yes No Yes 34260 DX2xxx DX2000 Yes No Yes 34260 CX1xxX CX1000 Yes No Yes 34260 Item f Default O CX2xxx Cx2000 Yes No Yes 34260 No Namen pre te Spesi Sn Value Pescnuption MV1xxx MV1000 Yes No Yes 34260 1 Model Enter text Device Enter the name of MV2xxx MV2000 Yes No Yes 34260 name Input range up to the device to be MX100 Same as No No Yes 34316 20 alphanumeric registered MW100 left No No Yes 34316 characters uR10000 Same as Yes No Yes 34260 2 Device Select from the list DX1000 Select the name of a uR20000 left Yes No Yes 34260 Type supported model or DA100 Yes
295. ucesatiqnmartatantniuseabeiquamnserasnesocra cco 4 1 1 Displaying the Data Collection Status ccccccesecececeeeeseeeeeseeneseeeeessanees 4 1 2 Displaying the Monitor PAG cscciiiiianvsidre pati imtentaavoridiadneiiatamtetnsiaineiasiintdeatst 4 1 3 Setting General Display Options ccccccsssssceeeceeeseeeeessenessseeesseneeesees 4 2 Monitoring on the Trend Display cccccsccccssececseseesseececeessesseseeeneuseesensensegs 4 2 1 Displayed Coment setasecte cana anieeeunenkarcaneuanbactnouedreeceieaehstadectmueRevenhe nite decmemeeRiae 4 2 2 Changing the Display ncccavssseicetonescvancersaanicetnuedeehcneneneantsendeatatenieshbedncenmetes 4 2 3 COMI OMNING TAG VAX IS ys sieciscsect acca ccinccasanessanctacshacacacten sesragieesadsedsedaienddaiesacceosannns 4 2 4 Showing and Hiding Waveforms Using the Legend ccccceeeeeseeeees 4 2 5 Viewing the Alarm Occurrence Status ccecceeeeessseeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 4 2 6 Reading Values with Cursor iccc22ccssceceacectiecereordshevedecnsenteRoxwandstesevbexdons tes 4 2 1 Adding WILK Sisascsnaverncnsucoustancasantencensstievssntanavenssngencvssantaecaaieenemerterentareessnaurss 4 3 Monitoring on the Digital DIS OIAY vince cacnacttantssaccccdscna tamandaaneniasieiastitasatancsdeasencesias 4 3 1 Displayed Come casni E E EARE EAE 4 3 2 Showing and Hiding Alarm Indicators ccccccccecssssseeeeeceeessseeeeeseeaseees 4A 4 Monitoring on
296. umber recording interval Condition The condition for executing the schedule Task Task Standard Print Custom Print Report Print Type Report type is displayed for Standard Print and Custom Print Output Print None Exist Report File PDF Excel None Output Folder Printer The selected printer Folder The specified output folder Details of schedule Screen Details of schedule Report 01 Absolute Time 2014 12 25 14 30 00 000 Print Exist Report File None Condition Everyday 14 30 00 Task Standard Print Group 01 01 Range Prev Day 14 30 00 Current Day 14 30 00 Print Type Trend Graph Printout Setup Print Graph Format 1 page Line Thick 1 0pt Tag Display Form Tag No Y Axis Column Num 1 Legend No Color Mode Color Mark Color CL Print Setup Printer OneNote 2010 3 3 Paper Size A4 Orientation Portrait Output Language English OK On the Details of schedule screen the details of the specified print schedule are displayed Setting the Report Print function RP option P section 3 6 IM 04L65B01 01EN 4 12 Chapter 4 Monitoring Data Collection 4 8 2 Report Print History The Report Print History tab shows the print execution history in a list The result of each schedule is displayed as Completed or Error in the Execute column In addition the following control buttons can be used to display the result of a selected schedule or re
297. unctions as those of typical projects There is no Simple Settings mode Math Tag appears when the Math function MT option is installed o B x Data Logging Software admin OPC UA File Edit View Project Operation User Help ESME Bho xX Ele F F ia ee Register Device J Update Setting Update Comm Kind Ethernet Serial GM10 GP10 GX20 l GM_M22 3 GP10 10 0 136 37 10 0 137 42 10 0 137 64 E Comm Kind Ethernet Serial USB Mv2000 mvio00 DX2000 oxo mie ie al aa 10 0 137 29 10 0 136 27 10 0 136 44 10 0 137 50 DX2000 FX1000 DX1000 uR10000 E S 10 0 136 57 10 0 136 77 10 0 136 68 10 0 137 51 CX2000 DX2000 Device Name GM_M22_3 setting E Device Type GM10 Version No R2 02 96 Comm Address 10 0 136 37 Depending on the access privileges of the user when the project is opened and the project status each of the displayed setting pages may be enabled or disabled See the table below Then a consistency check is performed between the server certificate and private key If the check fails error message E3070 will appear Setting Page button A button for calling up the project setting window The behavior is the same as that for typical projects Disabled ina locked sta
298. ur Hourly report Day Daily report Week Weekly report Month Monthly report Batch Batch report Custom Daily custom Free Batch and daily custom reports Computed results such as sum values of data in the file are appended to the file This piece of data is called Free Start date and time hh 00 to 23 Specifies the start hour Used in hourly reports dd 01 to 31 Specifies the start day Used in daily reports mmt Oto 12000 Specify the start minute Used in batch reports hh mm hh 00 to 23 Specifies the start hour time Used in Daily custom mm 00 to 59 reports End date and time hh 00 to 23 Specifies the end hour Used in hourly reports dd 01 to 31 Specifies the end day Used in daily reports mmt Oto 12000 Specify the end minute Used in batch reports hh mm hh 00 to 23 Specifies the end Used in Daily custom mm 00 to 59 hour minute reports Start number xxx 001 to 200 Specifies the start number Used in batch reports End number XXX 001 to 200 Specifies the end number 1 xxx is a number without a limitation on the number of digits 2 hhis a number without a limitation on the number of digits 3 dd is a number without a limitation on the number of digits 4 mm is a number without a limitation on the number of digits 5 Spaces are allowed before and after colons 6 Start time and end time are relative to the record start time App 5 xipueddy Appendix 1 Creating Report Templates Starting and E
299. vel 1 Time YYYY MM DD hh mm ss Type Alarm Detail Information ProjectName Tagindex TagNo TagComment AlarmLevel1AlarmType is occurred is released If a message occurs simultaneously at alarm level 1 and alarm level 2 Time YYYY MM DD hh mm ss Type Alarm Detail Information ProjectName Tagindex TagNo TagComment AlarmLevel1AlarmType is occurred is released ProjectName Taglndex TagNo TagComment AlarmLevel2Alarm Type is occurred is released Comm Status Comm Status Communication Disconnect Communication Recover Time YYYY MM DD hh mm ss Type Communication Status Detail Information The connection of Devicelndex DeviceName in ProjectName is disconnected recovered Loss Data PC time Time YYYY MM DD hh mm ss Type Communication Status Detail Information Data Lack in ProjectName is detected Loss Data Device time Time YYYY MM DD hh mm ss Type Communication Status Detail Information Data Lack in Devicelndex DeviceName in ProjectName is detected The duration of Data Lack is from YYYY MM DD hh mm ms to YYYY MM DD hh mm ms IM 04L65B01 01EN Specified Period Specified Period Everyday Time YYYY MM DD hh mm ss Type Periodically Notification Detail Information The condition of sending mail in ProjectName is at hh mm ss of every day Every Week Time YYYY MM DD hh mm ss Type Periodically Notification Detail Information The condition of sending mail in ProjectName is at hh mm ss of each xxday Every Month Time YYYY
300. vice Deivce Name Device UT55A Serial COM Port No 1 Deivce Type Comm Kind Comm Type Baud Rate 9600bps Parity None Stop Bit 1 Modbus Address 1 Monitor Interval 1 Second xj 15 Timeout 5000 Millisecond ae D OK Cancel No Item Name How to Specify ie Description 14 Modbus Enter text Input 1 This appears when Address range 1 to 247 Device Type is a Modbus device 15 Monitor Select from the list 1 sec Same as above Interval Selectable range 100 msec 200 msec 500 msec 1 sec 2 sec 5 sec 10 sec 20 sec 30 sec 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 16 Timeout Enter text 5000 Same as above Input range 100 msec msec to 10000 msec 17 Option Check box Not Displays the optional text selected strings defined in the Modbus device definition file in the order that they were defined Mie WEEE e To register any of the following instruments by specifying Comm Kind Serial and User set the A D scan interval and FIFO writing interval of the device to the same value DX1000 DX1000N DX1000T DX2000 DX2000T MV1000 MV2000 CX1000 CX2000 FX1000 e When connecting to a DXAdvanced DX1000 DX1000N DX1000T DX2000 or DX2000T with the AS1 advanced security option through the Ethernet interface log in as an administrator to access the DX In this si
301. vice Definition File The Modbus device definition file is a file that is referred to when a new Modbus device is registered on the Device Setting Page A Modbus device definition file is composed of the following four sections Option list This is where the Modbus device options are defined Register list This is where the Modbus device s registers that are read during data collection are defined Modbus Function codes register addresses data types and register names are specified in this section Channel list This is where the Modbus device s channels that are read during data collection are defined You can also specify channel settings collection data positions and related alarm information Value conversion table This is where the table for converting the data read from the Modbus device s registers into values for actual use is defined Modbus device definition files are in XML format Descriptions in files have a hierarchical structure For details on the format see Node Structure and subsequent pages Node Structure of Modbus Device Definition Files Level 0 Level 1 ModbusDevice Options Registers Channels Trans Tables Level 2 Option Register Channel Table Level 3 Init Value Alarms Value Level 4 DecimalPos Min Max Unit DataError ADError PlusOver MinusOver Burnout Alarm Level 5 Type Value Type Value Set Value Description D
302. without any data processing The figure shows an example of how data is recorded when the collection interval is 1 second the record interval for instantaneous values is 5 seconds and recording is started at 0 00 00 In instantaneous value recording the collected data at 0 00 00 0 00 05 and 0 00 10 are saved as record data The first collected data is called recording start point Recording data Q O O O O Collected data i l O 0 00 00 0 00 05 0 00 10 0 00 15 0 00 20 0 00 25 Collection interval 1 sec Record interval of instantaneous values 5 sec A Recording start point Time Click the Start Recording button to start data recording Note that the actual recording of data to data files starts when the recording start conditions are met Therefore GA10 may enter the recording standby state when the Start Recording button is clicked The following figure shows an example of how GA10 operates when an interval everyday every week every month and start time are specified as recording start conditions Recording standby Recording standby Recording standby Start Recording start Recording stop Recording start Recording stop Repeated from Recording condition met condition met condition met condition met this point clicked Recording data oe o o o o o o oe o o o ek O OIO O 0 0 0 O O O OG GO GO O O O O O O O O O Collected data Start Recording Start of recording End of recording Start o
303. yed of device and times or scan for each device scan interval intervals Device time i Monitor Sets are subdivided to display each combination of device and scan interval Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 8 10 What is PC time PC time is the time information that the server PC uses In PC time mode the server attaches PC timestamps on the data collected from devices This data is displayed on the Monitor Page and saved in recording files e Data collected using PC time will not necessarily be synchronized to the data of the corresponding devices gt Q9 e The timestamps attached to data in PC time mode are determined so that data collection would always occur at midnight 00 00 00 e The data collection interval and record interval are specified on GA10 e The data of all tags is saved to the same file What is Device time Device time is the time information that the data collection device uses In Device time mode the server collects and records data at the data acquisition intervals of devices If there are multiple acquisition intervals in a single device data is collected and recorded at each acquisition interval Device data and collected data are synchronized the values and timestamps match e Data collection and recording e Data is collected separately for each device and for each data collection interval e Data is collected and recorded at the devices data acquisition intervals You cannot specify the da
304. yste Gh Adaptive Brightness Monitors a Manual Local Service Gh Adobe Flash Playe COU E Manual Local Syste Sh Application Experi Processes a Manual Local Syste Sh Application Identity Determines Manual Local Service Gh Application Infor Facilitates t Manual Local Syste Gh Application Layer Provides su Manual Local Service Path to executable C Program Files Yokogawa Electric Corporation SMARTDAC Data Logging Automatic Delayed Start Gh Application Mana Processes in Manual Local Syste S Background Intelli Transfers fil Automatic D Local Syste Gh Base Filtering Engi The Base Fil Automatic Local Service Gh BitLocker Drive En BDESVC hos Manual Local Syste S Block Level Backu The WBENG Manual Local Syste Sh Bluetooth Support The Bluetoo Manual Local Service SA BranchCache This service Manual Network S Gh Certificate Propag Copies user Manual Local Syste Sh CNG Key Isolation The CNG ke Manual Local Syste Sh COM Event Syst Supports Sy Automatic Local Service Si COM System Ap Manages th Manual Local Syste Sh Computer Browser Maintains a Manual Local Syste Help me configure Automatic Service status aose You can specify the start parameters that apply when you start the service from here Start parameter Sh Credential Manager Provides se Manual Local Syste _

GA10 Data Logging Software User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents